Acura RL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 560
1 of 560

Summary of Content for Acura RL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owners manual in your vehicle so you can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealers staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations on your selection of the 2009 Acura RL. We are certain you will be pleased with your purchase of one of the finest luxury vehicles in the world.

Introduction

i 2009 RL

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag system component.

ii 2009 RL

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

on the vehicle. preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or Important Safety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety. how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it carefully.

These signal words mean:

Safety Labels Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety Section Instructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you dont follow instructions.

2009 RL

!"#$

%&'()

*+

,

-%&( ,.,

%&($/

$$,

01(*"234 $,

0" +/

*5266*7+,)

"8 52667+$/

3

&

/00X31-SJA-640

2 2009 RL

A convenient reference to the sections in this manual.

A quick reference to the main controls in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of each instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use the controls on the dashboard and steering column.

What gasoline to use, how to break- in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park; plus what you need to know if youre planning to tow a trailer.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

The maintenance minder shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer for maintenance service. There is also a list of things to check and instructions on how to check them.

This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and details how to handle them.

Important information about the proper use and care of your vehicles seat belts, an overview of the supplemental restraint system, and valuable information on how to protect children with child restraints.

A summary of the warranties covering your new vehicle, and how to contact us for any reason. Refer to your warranty manual for detailed information.

How to order manuals and other technical literature.

A summary of the information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Overview of Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Maintenance

Technical InformationContents

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

3 2009 RL

Canadian models only

RL models2 : 3 :

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM

(P.11, 26) PASSENGERS FRONT AIRBAG

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

INTERFACE DIAL

COMPASS SYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

MIRROR CONTROL AUTO BUTTON

DRIVERS FRONT AIRBAG

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.62)(P.11, 26)

CEILING CONSOLE

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

HOOD RELEASE LEVER

1: HOMELINK BUTTONS MOONROOF SWITCH POWER REAR SUNSHADE BUTTON REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

(P.163)

(P.153)

(P.185)

(P.154)

(P.334) (P.188)

(P.198)

(P.158) REAR SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P.184)

USB ADAPTER CABLE (P.259) (P.277)

(P.197)

(P.281)

(P.205, 213, 282)

(P.213)

(P.204)

(P.161)

(P.405)

(P.385)

(P.387)

2

1

3

2009 RL

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel. If equipped.

1 : 2 : 3 : 4 :

Canadian models only Refer to the navigation system manual.

Your Vehicle at a Glance Y

our V

ehicle ata

G lance

5

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

COLLISION MITIGATION BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) OFF SWITCH

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS

HEADLIGHTS/ TURN SIGNAL/ FOG LIGHTS (P.140, 142)

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.35)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) BUTTONS

MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS (P.71)

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

PADDLE SHIFTERS

(P.137)

WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER

FRONT SEAT HEATER SWITCHES FRONT SEAT HEATER AND SEAT VENTILATION BUTTONS

HEADLIGHT WASHER SWITCH

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS

(P.138)

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK BUTTONS

HORN DISTANCE BUTTON

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

(P.145)

(P.148) (P.278)

(P.356)

(P.304)

(P.328, 333) (P.182)

(P.181)/

(P.316)/

(P.162)

(P.147)/

(P.146)(P.146)

(P.161)

(P.319, 324)

(P.409)

(P.422)

(P.436)

2

2

2

2

3

1

2

4

2009 RL

6 2009 RL

This section gives you important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It shows you how to use seat belts. It explains how your airbags work. And it tells you how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8 .......Your Vehicles Safety Features . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13 .....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 15 ............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 16

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16 5. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 17 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 19 .....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

Additional Information About .......................Your Seat Belts . 21

..Seat Belt System Components . 21

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22 Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 23 ...........Seat Belt e-pretensioners . 24

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 25 Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 26 ......Airbag System Components . 26

How Your Front Airbags .........................................Work . 29

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32 How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 34 ..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34

How the Side Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 35

How the Passenger Airbag ...............Off Indicator Works . 35

.............................Airbag Service . 36 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

Protecting Children General ................................Guidelines . 38

All Children Must Be ...............................Restrained . 38

All Children Should Sit in a .................................Back Seat . 39

The Passengers Front Airbag .........Can Pose Serious Risks . 39

If You Must Drive with Several ...................................Children . 41

If a Child Requires Close ..................................Attention . 41

...Additional Safety Precautions . 41 Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 43 .......................Protecting Infants . 43

.........Protecting Small Children . 44 .....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45 ....................Installing a Child Seat . 46

...............................With LATCH . 47 .........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49

..............................With a Tether . 51 ...........Protecting Larger Children . 52

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 52 ..................Using a Booster Seat . 53

When Can a Larger Child Sit in .........................................Front . 54

...Additional Safety Precautions . 55 .............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

...................................Safety Labels . 57

Driver and Passenger Safety D

river and

P assenger

Safety

7 2009 RL

Youll find many safety recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The recommendations on this page are the ones we consider to be the most important.

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/ shoulder belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat

(see pages ).

Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So dont drink and drive, and dont let your friends drink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

17

5538

445

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition

Restrain All Children

Dont Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

8 2009 RL

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment; front and rear crush zones; a collapsible steering column; and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengers cant take full advantage of these features unless you remain sitting in a proper position and

. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

The following pages explain how you can take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicles Safety Features

always wear your seat belts

D river

and P

assenger Safety

9

(1)

(2)

(2)

(4)

(5) (7)

(7)

(11)

(9)

(6)

(8) (3)

(6)(10)

(8)

(9)

(1) Safety Cage (2) Crush Zones (3) Seats and Seat-Backs (4) Head Restraints (5) Collapsible Steering Column

: On model with Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

(6) Seat Belts (7) Front Airbags (8) Side Airbags (9) Side Curtain Airbags (10) Door Locks (11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/

Seat Belt e-pretensioners

2009 RL

Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device for adults and larger children. (Infants and smaller children must be properly restrained in child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and all Canadian provinces require you to wear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicle so you can take advantage of the vehicles built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

frontal impacts side impacts rear impacts rollovers

Help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle and against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown out of the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good position should the airbags ever deploy. A good position reduces the risk of injury from an inflating airbag and allows you to get the best advantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includes an indicator on the instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

10

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

2009 RL

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (SRS) with front airbags to help protect the heads and chests of the driver and a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe frontal collision (see page

for more information on how your front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags to help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact (see page for more information on how your side airbags work).

In addition, your vehicle has side curtain airbags to help protect the heads of the driver, front passenger, and passengers in the outer rear seating positions during a moderate to severe side impact (see page

for more information on how your side curtain airbags work).

29

32

34

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Airbags

D river

and P

assenger Safety

11 2009 RL

The most important things you need to know about your airbags are:

Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

The rest of this section gives more detailed information about how you can maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

They are designed to supplement the seat belts.

To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries or more serious or even fatal injuries if occupants are not properly restrained or sitting properly.

Your Vehicles Safety Features

What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rear impacts, or minor frontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

12 2009 RL

The following pages provide instructions on how to properly protect the driver, adult passengers, and teenage children who are large enough and mature enough to drive or ride in the front.

See pages for important guidelines on how to properly protect infants, small children, and larger children who ride in your vehicle.

After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure the doors are closed and locked.

Your vehicle has a door and trunk open indicators on the multi- information display to indicate when a specific door or the trunk is not tightly closed. You will see the appropriate indicator(s) and the message for each condition.

When one or more doors are not tightly closed, the DOOR OPEN indicator will come on.

Your vehicle has a programmable auto door locking/unlocking feature. For more information, see page .

You will also hear a beep when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and each time you open any door or the trunk with the key in the ON (II) position.

38

123

55

CONTINUED

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

Protecting Adults and Teens D

river and

P assenger

Safety

13 2009 RL

Locking the doors reduces the chance of someone being thrown out of the vehicle during a crash, and it helps prevent passengers from accidentally opening a door and falling out.

Locking the doors also helps prevent an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door when you come to a stop.

See page for how to lock the doors.When the trunk is not tightly closed,

the TRUNK OPEN indicator will come on.

When one or more doors and the trunk lid are not tightly closed, the corresponding indicator for each condition and the DOOR & TRUNK OPEN indicator will come on.

153

Protecting Adults and Teens

14 2009 RL

See page for how to adjust the front seats.

If you sit too close to the steering wheel or dashboard, you can be seriously injured by an inflating front airbag, or by striking the steering wheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. In addition to adjusting the seat, you can adjust the steering wheel up and down, and in and out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

Adjust the drivers seat as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. Have a front passenger adjust their seat as far to the rear as possible.

148

156

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Front Seats2.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

15

Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible.

2009 RL

Adjust the drivers head restraint so the center of the back of your head rests against the center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustable head restraints adjust their restraints properly as well. Taller persons should adjust their restraint as high as possible.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupants chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust the seat-backs.

Adjust the drivers seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat- backs should also adjust their seat- back to a comfortable, upright position.

156

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Head RestraintsAdjust the Seat-Backs 4.3.

16

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

2009 RL

CONTINUED

Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the belt is securely latched. Check that the belt is not twisted, because a twisted belt can cause serious injuries in a crash.

Properly adjusted head restraints will help protect occupants from whiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust the head restraints and how the drivers and front passengers active head restraints work.

157

Protecting Adults and Teens

Fasten and Position the Seat Belts

5.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

17

Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and you can be seriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

2009 RL

This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to work properly, it may not protect the occupant in a crash.

Using a seat belt that is not working properly can result in serious injury or death. Have your dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

See page for additional information about your seat belts and how to take care of them.

The front seats have adjustable seat belt anchors. To adjust the height of an anchor, press and hold the release buttons, and slide the anchor up or down as needed (it has four positions).

If the seat belt touches or crosses your neck, or if it crosses your arm instead of your shoulder, you need to adjust the seat belt anchor height.

This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

21

Protecting Adults and Teens

Never place the shoulder portion of a lap/shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt.

18

RELEASE BUTTON

Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

2009 RL

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Advice for Pregnant WomenMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

6.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

19

Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

2009 RL

If your hands or arms are close to an airbag cover, they could be injured if the airbag inflates.

Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or a side curtain airbag inflates, a cup holder or other hard object attached on or near the door could be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability of the belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

When driving, remember to sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. When riding as a front passenger, adjust the seat as far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by a crash or an inflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if its okay for you to drive.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Keep your hands and arms away from the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on or near a door.

Two people should never use the same seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seat belts.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Additional Safety Precautions

20 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Your seat belt system includes lap/ shoulder belts in all seating positions. The front seat belts are also equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners and, on models with collision mitigation brake system (CMBS), seat belt e-pretensioners.

The seat belt system includes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seat belts. If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before your seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash. If your seat belt is not fastened before the beeper stops, the indicator will stop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator will come on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position.

You will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display (see page ).

When no one is sitting in the front passengers seat, or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator should not come on and the beeper should not sound.

This system uses the same sensors as the front airbags to monitor whether the front seat belts are latched or unlatched, and how much weight is on the front passengers seat (see pages and ).

If either the driver or a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals.

31 32

79

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts D

river and

P assenger

Safety

21 2009 RL

To unlock the belt, press the red PRESS button on the buckle. Guide the belt across your body so that it retracts completely. After exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get closed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergency locking retractor. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely in your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body.

The lap/shoulder belt goes over your shoulder, across your chest, and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is latched (see page for how to properly position the belt).

If the indicator comes on or the beeper sounds when the drivers seat belt is latched and there is no front seat passenger and no items on the front seat, something may be interfering with the monitoring system. Look for and remove:

Any items under the front passengers seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

17

Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

22 2009 RL

For added protection, the front seat belts are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners. When activated, the tensioners immediately tighten the belts to help hold the driver and a front passenger in position.

The seat belts in all positions except the drivers have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat (see page ).

The tensioners can also be activated during a collision in which the front airbags . In this case, the airbags would not be needed, but the additional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated, the seat belts will remain tight until they are unbuckled.

If the shoulder part of the belt is pulled all the way out, the lockable retractor will activate. The belt will retract, but it will not allow the passenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor, unlatch the buckle and let the seat belt fully retract. To refasten the seat belt, pull it out only as far as needed.

The tensioners are designed to activate in any collision severe enough to cause the front airbags to deploy.

If a side curtain airbag deploys during a side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle will also deploy.

49

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts D

river and

P assenger

Safety

23 2009 RL

The e-pretensioners do not activate when the seat belts are not worn or when the vehicle stability assist (VSA) off indicator on the instrument panel is on.

For added safety, the front seat belts are equipped with e-pretensioners that work in combination with the collision mitigation brake system (CMBS) (see page ) and the brake pedal assist function (see page

).

If your vehicle gets too close to the vehicle ahead of it in your lane, the drivers e-pretensioner slightly retracts the seat belt to alert the driver of the approaching vehicle. If a collision with the vehicle in front of you is likely, the e-pretensioners on both front seats retract the seat belts with enough force to properly restrain you and your front passenger. After they activate, the e-pretensioners release the retracted seat belts.

To get the full benefit of the e-pretensioners, you and your front passenger must sit normally in your seats and wear your seat belts properly (see page ).

In addition, the front passengers e-pretensioner does not activate when the passengers airbag is automatically turned off because the weight sensor detects a child in the front passengers seat.

If the automatic seat belt tensioners are activated by a collision, both front seat belts and all related components must be replaced (see page ). If only the e-pretensioners were activated, no components need to be replaced.

17

25

419

416

On models with Collision Mitigation Brake System

Seat Belt e-pretensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

24 2009 RL

If a seat belt is worn during a crash, it must be replaced by the dealer. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect the anchors for damage and replace them if needed. If the automatic seat belt tensioners activate during a crash, they must be replaced.

For safety, you should check the condition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide good protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

Acura provides a limited warranty on seat belts. See your

booklet for details.

476

Acura Warranty Information

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Maintenance

D river

and P

assenger Safety

25

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

2009 RL

: On models with CMBS

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

26

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(8)

(7)

(6)

(4)

(5)

(10)

(9)

(9) (6) Drivers Seat Position Sensor (7) Front Passengers Seat Weight Sensors (8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (9) Side Impact Sensors (First) (10) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Sensors

(1) Drivers Airbag (2) Front Passengers Airbag (3) Control Unit (4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/

Seat Belt e-pretensioners (5) Side Airbags

2009 RL

Your airbag system includes:

Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG (see page

).

Two SRS (supplemental restraint system) front airbags. The drivers airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passengers airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG (see page ).

32

34

29

: On models with CMBS CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags D

river and

P assenger

Safety

27

(15)

(14)

(13)

(11)

(13)

(12)

(11) e-pretensioner Control Unit (12) Front Impact Sensors (13) Side Impact Sensors (Second) (14) Rear Safing Sensor (15) Side Curtain Airbags

2009 RL

Automatic front seat belt tensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect a moderate to severe front impact or side impact.

Sensors that can detect whether a child is in the passengers side airbag path and signal the control unit to turn the airbag off (see page ).

On models with CMBS, front seat belt e-pretensioners (see page ).

An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbags, sensors, seat belt tensioners (see page ), or, on models with CMBS, seat belt e-pretensioners (see page ).

An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you that the passengers side airbag has been turned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the passengers front airbag has been turned off (see page ).

Emergency backup power in case your vehicles electrical system is disconnected in a crash.

A drivers seat position sensor that monitors the distance of the seat from the front airbag. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force (see page

).

A sophisticated electronic system that continually monitors and records information about the sensors, the control unit, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.

Sensors that can detect whether the drivers seat belt and the front passengers seat belt are latched or unlatched (see page ).

Weight sensors that monitor the weight on the front passengers seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child), the passengers front airbag will be turned off (see page ).

23

24

34

24

35

35

31

21

33 31

Additional Information About Your Airbags

28 2009 RL

CONTINUED

After inflating, the front airbags will immediately deflate, so they wont interfere with the drivers visibility, or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is one-tenth of a second, so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seat belt restrains your lower body and torso, and the front airbag helps protect your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate to severe frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicles rapid deceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will instantly inflate the drivers and front passengers airbags, at the time and with the force needed.

Only the drivers airbag will deploy if there is no passenger in the front seat, or if the advanced airbag system has turned the passengers airbag off (see page ).31

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work

D river

and P

assenger Safety

29 2009 RL

Your front airbags are also dual- threshold airbags. Airbags with this feature have two deployment thresholds that depend on whether sensors detect the occupant is wearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupants belt is , the airbag will deploy at a slightly lower threshold, because the occupant would need extra protection.

Your front airbags are dual-stage airbags. This means they have two inflation stages that can be ignited sequentially or simultaneously, depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stages will ignite simultaneously to provide the quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage will ignite first, then the second stage will ignite a split second later. This provides longer airbag inflation time with a little less force.

After a crash, you may see what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from the airbags surface. Although the powder is not harmful, people with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

If the occupants belt is , the airbag will inflate at a slightly higher threshold, when the airbag would be needed to supplement the protection provided by the seat belt.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

latched

30 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advanced airbags. The main purpose of this feature is to help prevent airbag- caused injuries to short drivers and children who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to work properly:

Occupants must sit upright and wear their seat belts properly.

Back-seat passengers should not put their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructions could damage the sensors or prevent them from working properly.

The drivers advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor under the seat. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and the airbag will inflate in the normal manner regardless of the drivers seating position.

The passengers advanced front airbag system has weight sensors under the seat. Although Acura does not encourage carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of an infant or small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn the passengers front airbag off.

Do not spill any liquids on or under the seats, cover the sensors, or put any objects or metal items under the front seats.

Be aware that objects placed on the passengers seat can also cause the airbag to be turned off.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Advanced Airbags

D river

and P

assenger Safety

31

DRIVERS SEAT POSITION SENSOR

PASSENGERS SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR

2009 RL

Moving the front seat forcibly back against cargo on the seat or floor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the front passenger seat, or placing heavy items in the seat-back pocket.

When the airbag is turned off, a passenger airbag off indicator in the center of the dashboard comes on (see page ).

To ensure that the passengers advanced front airbag system will work properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passengers seat.

Also, make sure the floor mat behind the front passengers seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat may interfere with the proper operation of the sensors and operation of the seat.

If the weight sensors detect there is no passenger in the front seat, the airbag will be off. However, the passenger airbag off indicator will not come on.

If you ever have a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate either the drivers or the passengers side airbag.

35

477

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anything that would increase or decrease the weight on the front passengers seat.

32 2009 RL

There will be some delay between the moment the passenger moves into or out of the airbag deployment path and when the indicator comes on or goes off.

A front seat passenger should not use a cushion or other object as a backrest. It may prevent the cutoff system from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger.

To get the best protection from the side airbags, front seat occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.

If the side airbag off indicator comes on (see page ), have the passenger sit upright. Once the passenger is out of the airbags deployment path, the system will turn the airbag back on, and the indicator will go out.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff system designed primarily to protect a child riding in the front passengers seat.

Although Acura does not encourage children to ride in front, if the position sensors detect a child has leaned into the side airbags deployment path, the airbag will shut off.

The side airbag may also shut off if a short adult leans sideways, or a larger adult slouches and leans sideways into the airbags deployment path.

Objects placed on the front passenger seat can also cause the side airbag to be shut off.

35

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Side Airbag Cutoff System

D river

and P

assenger Safety

33 2009 RL

If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side curtain airbag will inflate even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.

If the indicator comes on or flashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after the engine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not come on after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, you should have the system checked by your dealer. For example:

In a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate the side curtain airbag and activate the seat belt tensioner on the drivers or the passengers side of the vehicle.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, this indicator comes on briefly then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

The SRS indicator alerts you to a potential problem with your airbags, seat belt tensioners, and, on models with CMBS, seat belt e-pretensioners.

How Your Side Curtain Airbags Work

How the SRS Indicator Works

Additional Information About Your Airbags

34

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

2009 RL

CONTINUED

You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page

).

If you see any of these indications, the airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when you need them.

This indicator alerts you that the passengers front airbag has been shut off because weight sensors detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child) on the front passengers seat. It does there is a problem with the airbag.

This indicator alerts you that the passengers side airbag has been automatically shut off. It does mean there is a problem with your side airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the indicator should come on briefly and then go out (see page ). If it does not come on, stays on, or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat, you will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi-information display. Have the system checked (see page ).

63

79

79

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Passenger Airbag Off Indicator Works

How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works

not mean

not

D river

and P

assenger Safety

35

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. Canada

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

2009 RL

Be aware that objects placed on the front seat can cause the indicator to come on.

If no weight is detected on the front seat, the airbag will be automatically shut off. However, the indicator will not come on.

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger is riding in front, move the seat as far to the rear as possible, and have the passenger sit upright and wear the seat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with no front seat passenger and no objects on the seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors. Look for and remove:

Any items under the front passengers seat.

Any object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear of the seat-back.

Your airbag systems are virtually maintenance free, and there are no parts you can safely service. However, you must have your vehicle serviced if:

Any airbag that has deployed must be replaced along with the control unit and other related parts. Any seat belt tensioner that activates must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replace any airbag by yourself. This must be done by an authorized dealer or a knowledgeable body shop.

If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag Service

An airbag ever inflates.

36 2009 RL

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from inflating during a side impact.

If water or another liquid soaks into the seat- back, it can prevent the side airbag cutoff system from working properly.

Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

Tampering could cause the airbags to deploy, possibly causing very serious injury.

This could make the drivers seat position sensor or the front passengers weight sensors ineffective. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, first contact Acura Client Services at 800-382-2238.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If you ignore this indication, your airbags may not operate properly.

Even if your airbags do not inflate, your dealer should inspect the drivers seat position sensor, the front passengers weight sensors, the front seat belt tensioners, and all seat belts and their anchors worn during a crash to make sure they are operating properly.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Do not cover or replace front seat- back covers without consulting your dealer.

Do not expose the front passengers seat-back to liquid.

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags.

Do not tamper with airbag components or wiring for any reason.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting your dealer.

The SRS indicator alerts you to a problem.

If your vehicle has a moderate to severe impact.

Additional Safety Precautions

D river

and P

assenger Safety

37 2009 RL

If you have children, or ever need to drive with a child in your vehicle, be sure to read this section. It begins with important general guidelines, then presents special information for infants, small children, and larger children.

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state and Canadian province requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

(see pages ). (see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protect them. However, despite their best intentions, many adults do not know how to protect child passengers.

5552 5143

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle

Larger children must be restrained with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a booster seat until the seat belt f its them properly

38

Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt and use a booster seat if necessary.

2009 RL

Front airbags have been designed to help protect adults in a moderate to severe frontal collision. To do this, the passengers front airbag is quite large, and it can inflate with enough force to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the childs head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating front airbag can strike the child with enough force to kill or very seriously injure a small child.

According to accident statistics, children of all ages and sizes are safer when they are restrained in a back seat.

Children who ride in back are less likely to be injured by striking interior vehicle parts during a collision or hard braking. Also, children cannot be injured by an inflating front airbag when they ride in the back.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children aged 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat. Some states have laws restricting where children may ride.

Even though your vehicle has an advanced front airbag system that automatically turns the passengers front airbag off (see page ), please follow these guidelines:

If the airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or very seriously injure an infant.

Whenever possible, larger children should sit in the back seat, on a booster seat if needed, and be properly restrained with a seat belt (see page for important information about protecting larger children).

35

52

CONTINUED

Protecting Children General Guidelines

The Passengers Front Airbag Can Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a Back Seat

Small Children Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers front airbag can be hazardous.

Larger Children

Infants Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers front airbag.

Children who have outgrown child seats are also at risk of being injured or killed by an inflating passengers front airbag.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

39 2009 RL

To remind you of the passengers front airbag hazards, and that children must be properly restrained in a back seat, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

40

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

2009 RL

Many parents say they prefer to put an infant or a small child in the front passenger seat so they can watch the child, or because the child requires attention.

Placing a child in the front seat exposes the child to hazards in a frontal collision, and paying close attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of driving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

Move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physical attention or frequent visual contact, we strongly recommend that another adult ride with the child in a back seat. The back seat is far safer for a child than the front.

Place the largest child in the front seat, provided the child is large enough to wear the lap/shoulder belt properly (see page ).

During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

If you are not wearing a seat belt in a crash, you could be thrown forward and crush the child against the dashboard or a seat-back. If you are wearing a seat belt, the child can be torn from your arms and be seriously hurt or killed.

17

52

156

19

Protecting Children General Guidelines

If You Must Drive with Several Children

If a Child Requires Close Attention

Additional Safety Precautions

Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child.

Never let two children use the same seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child on your lap.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

41 2009 RL

Leaving children without adult supervision is illegal in most states and Canadian provinces, and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and small children left in a vehicle on a hot day can die from heatstroke. A child left alone with the key in the ignition switch can accidentally set the vehicle in motion, possibly injuring themselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles can accidentally get trapped inside. Teach your children not to play in or around vehicles. Know how to operate the emergency trunk opener and decide if your children should be shown how to use this feature (see page ).

This can prevent children from accidentally falling out (see page ). If a child wraps a loose

seat belt around their neck, they can be seriously or fatally injured. (See pages and for how to activate and deactivate the lockable retractor.)

Even very young children learn how to unlock vehicle doors, turn on the ignition switch, and open the trunk, which can lead to accidental injury or death.

49 50

155

155

Do not leave children alone in a vehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk when your vehicle is not in use.

Use the childproof door locks to prevent children from opening the rear doors.

Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

Keep vehicle keys/remote transmitters out of the reach of children.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

42 2009 RL

A rear-facing child seat can be placed in any seating position in the back seat, but not in the front.

If the passengers front airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or seriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear- facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat as far back as recommended, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.

Two types of seats may be used: a seat designed exclusively for infants, or a convertible seat used in the rear- facing, reclining mode.

If placed facing forward, an infant could be very seriously injured during a frontal collision.

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the child reaches the seat makers weight or height limit for the seat, and the child is at least one year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat provides proper support for a babys head, neck, and back.

It could also interfere with proper operation of the passengers advanced front airbag system.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat.Do not put a rear-facing child seat in

a forward-facing position.

Child Seat Type

Protecting Infants

D river

and P

assenger Safety

43 2009 RL

Even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passengers front airbag off (see page ), a back seat is the safest place for a small child.

We also recommend that a small child use the child seat until the child reaches the weight or height limit for the seat.

We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a back seat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the childs head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating airbag can strike the child with enough force to cause very serious or fatal injuries.

A child who is at least 1 year old, and who fits within the child seat makers weight and height limits, should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, we recommend those that have a five- point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, we strongly recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passengers seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

31

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers airbag can be hazardous.

Child Seat Type

Protecting Small Children

44

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a collision.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the back seat, not the front.

2009 RL

Conventional child seats must be secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, whereas LATCH-compatible seats are secured by attaching the seat to hardware built into the two outer seating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seats are easier to install and reduce the possibility of improper installation, we recommend selecting this style.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- compatible child seat can be installed using a seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward- facing child seat in the front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, and be sure the child seat is firmly secured to the vehicle and the child is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to

provide proper protection, a child seat should meet three requirements:

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward- facing for small children.

When buying a child seat, you need to choose either a conventional child seat, or one designed for use with the Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) system.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

The child seat should be of the proper type and size to fit the child.

1.

2.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

45

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward- facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

2009 RL

After selecting a proper child seat and a good place to install the seat, there are three main steps in installing the seat:

All child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. A child whose seat is not properly secured to the vehicle can be endangered in a crash.

After installing a child seat, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, it does not need to be rock solid. Some side-to-side

movement can be expected and should not reduce the child seats effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, try installing it in a different seating position, or use a different style of child seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventional child seat, or using a previously purchased one, we recommend that you test the seat in the specific vehicle seating position or positions where the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child seat according to the child seat makers instructions. A child who is not properly secured in a child seat can be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provide guidelines on how to properly install a child seat. A forward-facing child seat is used in all examples, but the instructions are the same for rear- facing child seats.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat to the vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmly secured.

The child seat should fit the vehicle seating position (or positions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

3.

1.

2.

3.

46 2009 RL

CONTINUED

To install a LATCH-compatible child seat:

Move the seat belt buckle or tongue away from the lower anchors.

Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) at the outer rear seats.

Make sure there are no objects near the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors.

Push the rear head restraint tilt button on the ceiling console to pivot the head restraints down.

The lower anchors are located between the seat-back and seat bottom, and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with LATCH.

The location of each lower anchor is indicated by a small button above the anchor point.

You can find lower anchors in the slits in the seat-backs.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with LATCH

D river

and P

assenger Safety

47

LOWER ANCHORS

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON

BUTTON

2009 RL

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the child seat makers instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seats have a rigid-type connector as shown above.

Other LATCH-compatible seats have a flexible-type connector as shown above.

Whatever type you have, follow the child seat makers instructions for adjusting or tightening the fit.

Route the tether strap over the head restraint, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to the seat makers instructions.

Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Installing a Child Seat

48

RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

2009 RL

CONTINUED

When not using the LATCH system, all child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desired seating position, route the belt through the child seat according to the seat makers instructions, then insert the latch plate into the buckle.

To activate the lockable retractor, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops, then let the belt feed back into the retractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is not locked, and you will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions except the drivers have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/ Shoulder Belt

D river

and P

assenger Safety

49 2009 RL

To deactivate the lockable retractor and remove a child seat, unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure enough to stay upright during normal driving maneuvers. If the child seat is not secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to retract fully, then repeat these steps.

After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. Remember, if the lap part of the belt is not tight, the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help to put weight on the child seat, or push on the back of the seat while pulling up on the belt.

5.4.

Installing a Child Seat

50 2009 RL

A child seat with a tether can be installed in any seating position in the back seat, using one of the anchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is required or available.

Lift the anchor cover, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to the seat makers instructions.

After properly securing the child seat with the lap/shoulder belt (see page ), pivot the head restraint down (see page ) and route the tether strap over the head restraint.

1.

2.

3.

22 157

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Tether

D river

and P

assenger Safety

51

COVER ANCHOR

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

2009 RL

To determine if a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child, have the child put on the seat belt, then ask yourself:

Does the child sit all the way back against the seat?

Do the childs knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat?

When a child reaches the recommended weight or height limit for a forward-facing child seat, the child should sit in a back seat on a booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

52

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passengers front airbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, use a booster seat if needed, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly.

2009 RL

Does the shoulder belt cross between the childs neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the childs thighs?

Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in a back seat and use a booster seat until the lap/shoulder belt fits them properly without the booster.

If a child who uses a booster seat must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and be sure the child is wearing the seat belt properly.

A child may continue using a booster seat until the tops of their ears are even with the top of the vehicles or boosters seat-back. A child of this height should be tall enough to use the lap/shoulder belt without a booster seat.

Some states and Canadian provinces also require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the states or provinces where you intend

to drive.

Booster seats can be high-back or low-back. Whichever style you select, make sure the booster seat meets federal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the booster seat makers instructions.

3.

4.

5. 45

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children D

river and

P assenger

Safety

53 2009 RL

If you decide that a child can safely ride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owners manual, and make sure you understand all seat belt instructions and all safety information.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear- most position.

Have the child sit up straight, back against the seat, and feet on or near the floor.

Check that the childs seat belt is properly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten the seat belts or sit properly.

Of course, children vary widely. And while age may be one indicator of when a child can safely ride in front, there are other important factors you should consider.

If the passengers front airbag inflates in a moderate to severe frontal collision, the airbag can cause serious injuries to a child who is unrestrained, improperly restrained, sitting too close to the airbag, or out of position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If any part of a larger childs body is in the path of a deploying side airbag, the child could receive possibly serious injuries.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat.

Physically, a child must be large enough for the lap/shoulder belt to properly fit (see pages and ). If the seat belt does not fit properly, with or without the child sitting on a booster seat, the child should not sit in front.

To safely ride in front, a child must be able to follow the rules, including sitting properly, and wearing the seat belt properly throughout a ride.

5217

Protecting Larger Children

Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

54 2009 RL

This could result in serious neck injuries during a crash.

Devices intended to improve a childs comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can make the belt less effective and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

This could cause very serious injuries during a crash. It also increases the chance that the child will slide under the belt in a crash and be injured.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Do not let a child wear a seat belt across the neck.

Do not put any accessories on a seat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulder part of a seat belt behind the back or under the arm.

Two children should never use the same seat belt.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Larger Children D

river and

P assenger

Safety

55 2009 RL

Your vehicles exhaust contains carbon monoxide gas. Carbon monoxide should not enter the vehicle in normal driving if you maintain your vehicle properly and follow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide can collect rapidly in enclosed areas, such as a garage. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even with the door open, run the engine only long enough to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever:

With the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into your vehicles interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running, even in an unconfined area, adjust the climate control system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode. Select the mode. Turn the fan on high speed. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accident that may have damaged the underside.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

56

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

2009 RL

CONTINUED

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact your dealer for a replacement.

Canadian models

U.S. models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels D

river and

P assenger

Safety

57

HOOD

DASHBOARD

RADIATOR CAP

2009 RL

U.S. models

Canadian models U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

58

SUN VISORS

DOORJAMBS

2009 RL

This section gives information about the controls and displays that contribute to the daily operation of your vehicle. All the essential controls are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60 ............................Instrument Panel . 61

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62 .............................................Gauges . 70

...................Temperature Gauge . 70 ..................................Fuel Gauge . 70

.............Multi-Information Display . 71 Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 136 Windshield Wipers and

.....................................Washers . 137 .......Turn Signals and Headlights . 140

.................................Fog Lights . 142 .........Daytime Running Lights . 142

Automatic Lighting Off ...................................Feature . 143

Adaptive Front Lighting System ..........................................(AFS) . 144

...............Hazard Warning Button . 146 ......Instrument Panel Brightness . 146

...............Rear Window Defogger . 147 ......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 148

.............................Keys and Locks . 150 ......................Immobilizer System . 151

..............................Ignition Switch . 152 ....................................Door Locks . 153

..............................................Trunk . 154 ......Emergency Trunk Opener . 155

................Childproof Door Locks . 155 ...............................................Seats . 156

...........................................Mirrors . 161 Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 163 ................Keyless Access System . 166

.......................Front Seat Heaters . 181 Front Seat Heaters and Seat

.................................Ventilation . 182 Rear Seat Heaters

...................(Canadian models) . 184 ............................Power Windows . 185

.......................................Moonroof . 188 ...............................Parking Brake . 191

.........Interior Convenience Items . 192 ..................................Glove Box . 193

.....................Beverage Holders . 194 .............Console Compartment . 195

..................................Sun Visors . 196 ............................Vanity Mirror . 196

........Accessory Power Sockets . 197 ..................Front Door Pockets . 197

..............Power Rear Sunshade . 198

..............Integrated Sunshades . 199 ...............................Interior Lights . 200

Instruments and Controls Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

59 2009 RL

Canadian models only

2 : 3 :

RL models

Control Locations

60

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS GAUGES

HOOD RELEASE LEVER

MIRROR CONTROL AUTO BUTTON(P.62)

(P.70)

CEILING CONSOLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

INTERFACE DIAL

COMPASS SYSTEM

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM

1 : HOMELINK BUTTONS MOONROOF SWITCH POWER REAR SUNSHADE BUTTON

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

REAR SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

(P.163)

(P.153)

(P.185)

(P.154)

(P.334) (P.188)

(P.198) REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON (P.158)

(P.184)

USB ADAPTER CABLE (P.259)

(P.277)

(P.197)

(P.281)

(P.205, 213, 282)

(P.213)

(P.204)

(P.161)

(P.385)

(P.387)

(P.405)

1

2

3

2009 RL

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text. If equipped.:

Instrument Panel Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

61

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED POWER STEERING SYSTEM (ECPS) INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

MESSAGE INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.64)

(P.68)

(P.68)

(P.69)

(P.71)

(P.21, 62)

(P.68)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR

(P.34, 63) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.35, 63)

(P.65)

(P.65)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.64)SH-AWD INDICATOR (P.66) LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATOR

(P.66)

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS) INDICATOR

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) INDICATOR

(P.65) /CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

COLLISION MITIGATION BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) INDICATOR (P.69)

(P.69, 144)

(P.66, 319)

(P.62, 506)

(P.62, 507)

(P.62, 506)

(P.435)

(P.65, 435)

(P.64, 417)

(P.63, 508)

(P.67, 429)

2009 RL

The instrument panel has many indicators to give you important information about your vehicle.

You will also see a CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

The engine can be severely damaged if this indicator flashes or stays on when the engine is running, or if a CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL message is on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged, and you will also see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It reminds you and your passenger to fasten your seat belts. A beeper also sounds if you have not fastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before fastening your belt, the beeper sounds and the indicator flashes. If you do not fasten your seat belt before the beeper stops, the indicator stops flashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator comes on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position.

If either of you do not fasten your seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals. For more information, see page .

You will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display (see page ).

21

79

506

506

507

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Charging System Indicator

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

62 2009 RL

This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates a potential problem with your front airbags. This indicator will also alert you to a potential problem with your side airbags, passengers side airbag automatic cutoff system, side curtain airbags, automatic seat belt tensioners drivers seat position sensor, the front passengers weight sensors, or, on models with ACC, seat belt e-pretensioners. You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi- information display (see page ). For more information, see page .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It is a reminder to check the parking brake. Driving with the parking brake not fully released can damage the rear brakes, axles, and tires. If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a beeper will sound, and you will also see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If it stays on after you have fully released the parking brake while the engine is running, or if it comes on while driving, it can indicate a problem in the brake

system. You will also see a BRAKE FLUID LOW or CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that the passengers side airbag has automatically shut off. You will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi- information display (see page ). For more information, see page .

1.

2.

3578 79 35

79

508

Instrument Panel Indicators

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

63

U.S. Canada

U.S. Canada

2009 RL

This indicator reminds you that the exterior lights are on. It comes on when the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicator will also come on when the light switch is in AUTO and the lights turn on automatically. If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position without turning off the light switch, this indicator will remain on. A reminder chime will also sound when you open the drivers door.

This indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It will then go off if you have a properly- coded remote. If it is not a properly- coded remote, the indicator will blink and the engine will not start (see page ).

If you use the remote, this indicator blinks several times when you turn the ignition switch from ACCESSORY (I) to the LOCK (0) position.

If you use the built-in key, this indicator blinks several times when you turn the ignition switch from ON (II) to the ACCESSORY (I) position.

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position. If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the ABS. If this happens, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function. You will also see a CHECK ABS

SYSTEM message on the multi- information display (see page ). For more information, see page .

The left or right turn signal indicator blinks when you signal a lane change or turn. If the indicator does not blink or blinks rapidly, it usually means one of the turn signal bulbs is burned out (see page ). Replace the bulb as soon as possible, since other drivers cannot see that you are signaling.

When you press the hazard warning button, both turn signals blink. All turn signals on the outside of the vehicle should flash.

78

151

417

470

Instrument Panel Indicators

Lights On Indicator

Immobilizer System Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

64 2009 RL

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. For more information, see page .

It comes on along with the VSA system indicator if there is a problem with the VSA system. You will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi- information display (see page ).

If it comes on and stays on at any other time, or it does not come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, there is a problem with the VSA system. You will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi- information display (see page ). Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. Without VSA, your vehicle still has normal driving ability, but will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on when you turn on the fog lights. For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on with the high beam headlights. For more information, see page .

This indicator also comes on with reduced brightness when the daytime running lights (DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when you turn on the cruise control system by pressing the CRUISE button on the steering wheel (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

78

78

142

140

142

316

435

435

435

On models without adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Instrument Panel Indicators

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Fog Light Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

65 2009 RL

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

When you push the ACC button on the steering wheel, this indicator comes on green. You will also see ACC on the multi-information display.

If the indicator comes on orange, there is a problem with the ACC system. You will also see a CHECK ACC SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page

). Take your vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. For more information, see page .

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It comes on as a reminder that you must refuel soon. You will also see a FUEL LOW message on the multi- information display (see page ). When the indicator comes on, there is about 2.69 U.S. gal (10.2 ) of fuel remaining in the tank before the needle reaches E. There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the needle does reach E.

If the indicator blinks while driving, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to Park, and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out.

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the SH-AWD system. You will also see a CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. For more information, see page .

If it comes on while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is too high. You will also see a SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. HIGH message on the multi-information display (see page

).

79

79

78

78

319

413

On models with adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Instrument Panel Indicators

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) Indicator

66

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

2009 RL

Pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to Park, and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out.

You will also see a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message on the multi- information display (see page ).

Check the tire pressure monitor on the multi-information display and determine the cause (see page ).

If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, check which tire has lost pressure on the multi- information display, and determine the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, have the flat tire repaired as soon as possible. If two or more tires are underinflated, call a professional towing service. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

This indicator has two functions:

If it comes on while driving, it indicates that one or more of your vehicles tires are significantly low on pressure.

If this indicator begins to flash, there is a problem with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. The indicator continues to flash for a while (approximately 1 minute), then stays on. If this happens, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible. For more information, see page

.

1.

2.

79

431

519

429

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

67

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD indicator blinking may cause serious damage to the system.

2009 RL

This indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition to the ON (II) position and goes off after the engine starts. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the power steering system. You will also see a CHECK POWER STEERING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine, and watch this indicator. If it does not go off or comes back on again while driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the indicator on, the ECPS is turned off, which could make the vehicle harder to steer.

This indicator comes on when there is a system message on the multi- information display. Press the INFO button on the steering wheel (see page ) to see the message (see page ).

Most of the time, this indicator comes on along with other indicators in the instrument panel such as the seat belt reminder indicator, SRS indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

The indicator comes on when you run the engine while the vehicle is not moving. To turn the indicator off, restart the engine.

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that there is a problem with the system. You will also see a CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page

). For more information, see page .

78

71 78

79 179

Instrument Panel Indicators

Message IndicatorElectronically Controlled Power Steering System (ECPS) Indicator

Keyless Access System Indicator

68 2009 RL

This indicator comes on when the security system is set. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

It comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the adaptive front lighting system (AFS).

This indicator blinks when there is a problem with the AFS system; you will also see a CHECK ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position, and restart the engine. If the indicator does not go off or blinks again, take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It also comes on as a

reminder that you have turned off the collision mitigation brake system (CMBS).

The CMBS indicator also comes on if dirt or other debris blocks the radar sensor in the front grille. You will also see a CHECK CMBS RADAR SENSOR message on the multi-information display. When you clean the radar sensor, the indicator should go off the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the CMBS. You will also see a CHECK CMBS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. If this happens, take your vehicle to a dealer, and have it checked. For more information, see page . When this indicator is on, the CMBS is not working.

78

144

315

423

If equipped

If equipped

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Indicator

Security System Indicator

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS) Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

69

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

2009 RL

This shows the temperature of the engines coolant. During normal operation, the pointer should rise from the bottom white mark to about the middle of the gauge. In severe driving conditions, such as very hot weather or a long period of uphill driving, the pointer may rise to the

upper end of the white section of the gauge. If it reaches the red (hot) mark, pull safely to the side of the road. For more information, see page

.

This shows how much fuel you have. It may show slightly more or less than the actual amount. The needle returns to the bottom after you turn off the ignition.

503

Gauges

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

70

U.S. model is shown.

TACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGESPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could cause the engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter.

2009 RL

The multi-information display in the instrument panel displays various information and messages when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. Some of the messages help you operate your vehicle more comfortably. Others help to keep you aware of the periodic maintenance your vehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving.

You can change the display and customize your vehicle control settings by pressing the SEL/RESET or INFO buttons on the right side of the steering wheel.

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, the lower part of the multi-information display changes as shown in the illustration, each time you press the SEL/RESET button.

When you open the drivers door, a Welcome message is shown on the multi-information display. When you turn the ignition switch from the ON (II) position to the ACCESSORY (I) position, a Goodbye message is shown on the display.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

71

U.S. CANADA

INFO ( / ) BUTTONS

SEL RESET BUTTON

2009 RL

The odometer shows the total distance your vehicle has been driven. It measures miles in U.S. models and kilometers in Canadian models. It is illegal under U.S. federal law and Canadian provincial regulations to disconnect, reset, or alter the odometer with the intent to change the number of miles or kilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since you last reset it. There are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip B. Each trip meter works independently, so you can keep track of two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button until the number resets to 0.0.

When you reset Trip A, average fuel economy A is reset at the same time. When you reset Trip B, average fuel economy B is reset.

In the customizing mode, you can set Trip A, average fuel economy A, and average speed to reset at the same time when you refuel your vehicle (see page ).99

Multi-Information Display

Odometer Trip Meter

72

ODOMETER TRIP METER

2009 RL

This shows the outside Fahrenheit temperature in U.S. models, and Celsius temperature in Canadian models.

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. The temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the road surface, engine heat, and the exhaust from surrounding traffic. This can cause an incorrect temperature reading when your vehicle speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). When you start your trip, the sensor is not fully acclimatized, therefore it may take several minutes until the proper temperature is displayed.

This shows the remaining life of the engine oil. It shows 100% after the engine oil is replaced and the display is reset. The engine oil life is calculated based on engine operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions. For more information, see page .

You can adjust the outside temperature display (see page ).

In certain weather conditions, temperature readings near freezing (32F, 0C) could mean that ice is forming on the road surface.

97

445

Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

73

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

U.S.

CANADA

ENGINE OIL LIFE

2009 RL

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, the upper part of the display changes, as shown in the illustration, each time you press the

button. If you press the button, the display returns to the previous message.

Multi-Information Display

Normal Display Messages

74

U.S. CANADA If ON

Press the button Press the button

2009 RL

When you turn off the engine, INST. MPG or INST. L/100 km is also reset.

This shows your current fuel mileage.

Along with the trip meter, the trip computer calculates these values:

Instantaneous fuel mileage Range Elapsed Time

Average Fuel Economy Average Vehicle Speed

This shows the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy you received over the last several miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),

so it will vary with changes in speed, traffic, etc.

When the battery is disconnected, or you refuel, RANGE is also reset.

This shows the time passed traveled since you last reset it. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.

You can customize the ELAPSED TIME reset condition on the multi- information display (see page ).

This shows the average speed you are traveling in miles per hour (mph) for U.S. models or kilometers per hour (km/h) for Canadian models.

When you reset Trip A, average speed is also reset.

You can customize the average speed reset condition on the multi- information display (see page ).

This shows your vehicles average fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models) or liter/100 km (Canadian models) since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.

The average fuel mileage will be reset when you reset the trip meter, or if the vehicles battery goes dead or is disconnected.

You can customize the average fuel A reset condition on the multi- information display (see page ).

101

99

99

Multi-Information Display

INST. MPG (U.S. models)/INST. L/100km (Canadian models)

Trip Computer

RANGE

ELAPSED TIME

AVERAGE SPEED

AVERAGE FUEL A/B

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

75 2009 RL

This monitor shows how much torque is being delivered to each wheel. For more information, see page .

When the tire pressure monitor is shown on the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. The display changes as shown. You can see the pressure of each tire in this monitor. If one or more tires are low, inflate them to the correct pressure. For more information, see page .

You can receive or make phone calls from your cell phone through your vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system without touching your cell phone.413

429

Multi-Information Display

SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor

Tire Pressure Monitor Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

76

U.S.

Canada

2009 RL

When the engine oil life reaches 15%, the display shows SERVICE DUE SOON and the code for the maintenance items to be performed.

Have your dealer do the indicated maintenance as soon as you see this message, and have them reset the display after completing the service.

If you do not perform the indicated maintenance or do not reset the display, the message changes to SERVICE PAST DUE when the engine oil life becomes 0%.

These messages appear on the multi- information display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

For details on engine oil life and maintenance messages, refer to page

.

Also refer to page for important maintenance safety precautions.

When the engine oil life reaches 5%, the display shows SERVICE DUE NOW along with the same maintenance items.

To use the system, your cell phone and the HFL system must be linked. Not all cell phones are compatible with this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to link your cell phone to HFL and how to receive or make phone calls, or visit the acura.com/handsfreelink website.

355

445

444

Maintenance Messages

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

77 2009 RL

When a problem is detected with your vehicle, a message will be shown on the multi-information display. If this happens, refer to the applicable pages of this owners manual, and follow the instructions.

When there are several messages to be shown, the system switches the messages every 5 seconds. The message is shown until you push the INFO ( or ) button. To see the message again, press the INFO ( or ) button, 5 seconds after the display disappears.

Here is a list of messages shown on the multi-information display:

See page 68

See page 69, 144

See page 63, 508

See page 508

See page 62, 506

See page 62, 507

See page 62, 506

See page 404

See page 505

See page 64, 417

See page 65, 435

See page 66, 413

Multi-Information Display

Message Display

78 2009 RL

CONTINUED

See page 13

See page 35, 63

See page 62

See page 142

See page 62

See page 34, 63

See page 319

See page 66

See page 179

See page 177

See page 178

See page 405

See page 464

See page 423

See page 69, 420

See page 387

See page 433

See page 431

See page 67, 431

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

79

U.S.

Canada

2009 RL

See page 152

See page 152

See page 447

Multi-Information Display

80 2009 RL

With the multi-information display

and the INFO ( / ) and SEL/ RESET buttons on the right side of the steering wheel, you can customize some vehicle control settings for DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2. If DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 is not displayed, customizing is not possible.

To have the drivers ID detected, make sure your remote is linked to the system (see

on page ). Then use your remote to unlock the doors (see

on page ).

To enter the customizing mode, press and hold the INFO ( / ) button for more than 3 seconds while the multi-information display is in its normal mode.

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position, or move the shift lever out of Park, the display will change to the normal screen.

When the multi-information display does not show the drivers ID.

The first customizing menu is: CHG SETTING (see page )

If you disconnect the battery, and then do not unlock the door.

When the keyless memory settings are off (see page ). DEFAULT ALL (see page )

You cannot customize the settings under these conditions:

To change the settings, the ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position, and the vehicle must be stopped with the transmission in Park.

Refer to the following table for a brief summary of each customizable setting and its default. For more information, refer to the page number references in the table.

104

108

87 85173

CONTINUED

Customized Settings

Memory Position Link

Keyless Access Setup

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

81 2009 RL

CUSTOMIZE MENU Page 90

92

95

97

99

101

104

106

ACC SETUP (see page 89)

METER SETUP (see page 94)

POSITION SETUP (see page 103)

CHG SETTING (see page 87)

PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT BEEP ACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY

TRIP A RESET with REFUEL

ELAPSED TIME RESET

MEMORY POSITION LINK

AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC

Description Causes the system to beep when a vehicle ahead of you gets too close. Changes the ACC display speed unit. Changes the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature reading above or below its current reading. Causes trip meter A, the average fuel economy, and the average speed to reset when you refuel. Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.

Changes the drivers seat, the steering wheel, and the outside mirror positions to your stored setting. Moves the steering wheel fully in and out when the key is removed.

ON OFF mph km/h ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH

ON OFF

IGN OFF TRIP A TRIP B ON OFF

ON OFF

1 : 2 : 3 :

Default setting Default setting for U.S. models Default setting for Canadian model

CUSTOMIZE GROUPCUSTOMIZE ENTRY

5F 0F 5F 3C 0C 3C

CUSTOMIZE SET UP 1

2

3

1

1

1

1

1

2

3

previous setting

Multi-Information Display

82 2009 RL

DOOR UNLOCK MODE

KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH

KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME

HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY

AUTO DOOR LOCK

CUSTOMIZE MENU KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP (see page 108)

LIGHTING SETUP (see page 115)

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP (see page 122)

Page 109

111

113

116

118

120

123

CHG SETTING (see page 87)

Description Changes which doors unlock when you use the remote or grab the drivers door handle. Causes some exterior lights to blink twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle. Cause the beeper to sound twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle. Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights stay on after you close the doors. Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door. Changes the light level that causes the headlights to come on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO position. Changes when the doors automatically lock.

DRIVER DOOR ONLY ALL DOORS ON OFF

ON OFF

60 SEC 30 SEC 15 SEC 60 SEC 30 SEC 15 SEC MAX HIGH MID LOW SHIFT FROM P WITH VEH SPD OFF

: Default setting

0 SEC

MIN

CONTINUED

CUSTOMIZE GROUPCUSTOMIZE ENTRY CUSTOMIZE SET UP

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

83 2009 RL

CUSTOMIZE MENU DOOR/WINDOW SETUP (see page 122)

WIPER SETUP (see page 133)

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

DOOR LOCK MODE

KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

WIPER ACTION

SHIFT TO P IGN OFF OFF DRIVER DOOR ALL DOORS

ON OFF

90 SEC 60 SEC 30 SEC

INTERMITTENT WITH VEH SPD

SET

Page 125

127

129

131

134

85

CHG SETTING (see page 87)

DEFAULT ALL (see page 85)

Description Changes when the doors automatically unlock.

Changes which doors unlock with the first push of the remotes unlock button. The exterior lights flash each time you press the LOCK or UNLOCK button. Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the drivers door without opening it. Changes the wiper operation among two settings when the wiper switch is in the INT position. Changes all settings to the default.

: Default setting

CUSTOMIZE GROUP

CANCEL

CUSTOMIZE ENTRY CUSTOMIZE SET UP

Multi-Information Display

84 2009 RL

Use the INFO ( / ) button on the steering wheel to select the settings and the SEL/RESET button to enter your selections.

If you want the settings as they were when the vehicle left the factory, select DEFAULT ALL, as described on this page.

If you want to set the default settings, press the INFO ( / ) button to select DEFAULT ALL, then press the SEL/RESET button.

If you want to cancel DEFAULT ALL, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If you want to change any vehicle control settings, select CHG SETTING, then press the SEL/ RESET button.

CONTINUED

DEFAULT ALL

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

85 2009 RL

To set the default settings again, select DEFAULT ALL, and press the SEL/RESET button. Then select SET, and press the SEL/RESET button.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen returns to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If DEFAULT ALL is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to the normal message mode. Repeat the procedure to select DEFAULT ALL.

Multi-Information Display

86 2009 RL

You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to your preference. Here are the settings you can customize:

METER SETUP

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SETUP

POSITION SETUP

WIPER SETUP DOOR/WINDOW SETUP LIGHTING SETUP KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP

While CHG SETTING in the CUSTOMIZE ENTRY is shown on the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to ACC SETUP in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown on the next page. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setup you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

CHG SETTING

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

87 2009 RL

Multi-Information Display

88

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SETUP see page 89

METER SETUP see page 94

POSITION SETUP see page 103

KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP see page 108

LIGHTING SETUP see page 115

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP see page 122

WIPER SETUP see page 133Press the or button.

Press the SEL/RESET button.

2009 RL

If equipped Here are the two custom settings for adaptive cruise control (ACC):

PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT BEEP ACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select ACC SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the display changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Adaptive Cruise Control Setup

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

89

see page 90

see page 92 Press the SEL/RESET button. Press the or button.

2009 RL

While the multi-information display is in the ACC SETUP of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

When PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT BEEP is set to ON, one beep sounds when the ACC detects a vehicle in front of you. You also hear a beep when that vehicle goes out of the range of your vehicles radar sensor.

Pre-Running Car Detect Beep

Multi-Information Display

90 2009 RL

When your choice is set, the display changes to the screen shown above for several seconds, and then goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

To exit PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT BEEP without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

If you choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the pre- running car detect beep setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

91 2009 RL

While the multi-information display is in the ACC SETUP of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. The highlighted unit, mph or km/h, is the current setting. To change the setting, press the INFO ( / ) button until the unit you want is highlighted, then press the SEL/ RESET button.

To change the unit of measurement from mph to km/h, do this:

Adaptive Cruise Control Display Speed Unit

Multi-Information Display

92 2009 RL

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

To exit ACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the ACC display speed unit setup.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

93 2009 RL

LANGUAGE SELECTION ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY

Here are the four custom settings for the meter setup:

TRIP A RESET with REFUEL ELAPSED TIME RESET

While METER SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Meter Setup

Multi-Information Display

94

see page 97

see page 99

see page 101

see page 95

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

2009 RL

There are three language selections you can make: English, French, and Spanish. To choose the language you want, follow these instructions:

While METER SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. You will see the above display.

Select the desired language by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

Language Selection

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

95 2009 RL

To exit LANGUAGE SELECTION without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

All messages on the multi- information display will be shown in the language you selected.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the language selection setup.

Multi-Information Display

96 2009 RL

While the multi-information display is in the METER SETUP of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. The highlighted number is the current setting above or below the outside temperature. Press the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly until the number you want appears, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

If you sometimes find that the temperature reading is a few degrees above or below the actual temperature, you can adjust it by following these instructions:

CONTINUED

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

97 2009 RL

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

To exit ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the adjust outside air temperature display setup.

Multi-Information Display

98 2009 RL

While METER SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

To cause trip A, average fuel economy A, and average speed to reset every time you refuel your vehicle, follow these instructions:

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Trip A Reset with Refuel

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

99 2009 RL

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the trip A reset with refuel setup.

To exit TRIP A RESET with REFUEL without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

Multi-Information Display

100 2009 RL

While METER SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

IGN OFF The elapsed time is reset when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

TRIP A The elapsed time is reset when Trip A is reset.

TRIP B The elapsed time is reset when Trip B is reset.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

There are three elapsed time reset choices you can make:

CONTINUED

Elapsed Time Reset

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

101 2009 RL

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

To exit ELAPSED TIME RESET without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the elapsed time reset setup.

Multi-Information Display

102 2009 RL

There are two position setups you can make:

MEMORY POSITION LINK AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select POSITION SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, and then press the SEL/RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Position Setup

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

103

see page 104

see page 106 Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

2009 RL

When Memory Position Link is set to ON, the drivers seat, the steering wheel, and the outside mirror positions move to the positions stored in memory. To cause the memory to activate, open the drivers door with the remote, or grab the door handle while carrying the remote.

To set the seat memory position, see page . For information on using the remote, see page . While the multi-information display

is in the POSITION SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

163 173

Memory Position Link

Multi-Information Display

104 2009 RL

To exit MEMORY POSITION LINK without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the memory position link setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

105 2009 RL

When AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC is set to ON, the steering wheel automatically moves fully in and up when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position and release it, or when you remove the built-in key from the ignition switch.

While the multi-information display is in the POSITION SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Auto Tilt & Telescopic

Multi-Information Display

106 2009 RL

To exit AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the auto tilt and telescopic setup.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

107 2009 RL

DOOR UNLOCK MODE KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the custom setting then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

There are three settings in the keyless access setup:

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button.

Keyless Access Setup

Multi-Information Display

108

see page 109

see page 111

see page 113

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

2009 RL

To select whether the drivers door or all doors unlock when you open the drivers door with the remote or by grabbing the door handle (while carrying the remote), follow these instructions:

While the multi-information display is in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select DRIVER DOOR ONLY or ALL DOORS by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Door Unlock Mode

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

109 2009 RL

To exit DOOR UNLOCK MODE without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the door unlock mode setup.

Multi-Information Display

110 2009 RL

When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH is set to ON, some exterior lights blink twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote.

While the multi-information display is in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

The same exterior lights blink once when you lock the doors by touching the door lock sensor while carrying the remote.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Keyless Access Light Flash

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

111 2009 RL

To exit KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the keyless access light flash setup.

Multi-Information Display

112 2009 RL

When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP is set to ON, the beeper sounds twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote.

When you lock the doors by touching the door lock sensor while carrying the remote, the beeper sounds once.

While the multi-information display is in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Keyless Access Beep

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

113 2009 RL

To exit KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the keyless access beep setup.

Multi-Information Display

114 2009 RL

There are three settings in the lighting setup:

INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME

While CUSTOMIZE GROUP is shown on the multi-information display, select LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button.

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button, until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Lighting Setup

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

115

see page 116

see page 118

see page 120Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

2009 RL

While LIGHTING SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. You will see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select how long you want the lights to stay on before they fade out (60, 30, or 15 seconds) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

The interior lights fade out when you close all doors and the trunk. To change how long the lights stay on before they fade out, follow these instructions:

Interior Light Dimming Time

Multi-Information Display

116 2009 RL

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

To exit INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the interior light dimming time setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

117 2009 RL

The headlights, parking lights, side marker lights, taillights, and license plate lights go off after the selected time when you close the drivers door and take the remote with you. To change how long the lights stay on before they go off, follow these instructions:

While the multi-information display is in the LIGHTING SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select how long you want the lights to stay on before they go off (0, 15, 30, or 60 seconds) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Multi-Information Display

118 2009 RL

To exit HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the headlight auto off timer setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

119 2009 RL

MAX The headlights come on when it is bright. HIGH The headlights come on when it is somewhat bright. MID The headlights come on when it is as bright as sunset or sunrise. LOW The headlights come on when it is somewhat dark. MIN The headlights come on when it is dark.

While LIGHTING SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select from five levels of sensitivity by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

The headlights automatically come on when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ambient light reaches a changeable level. You can select the auto light sensitivity from the following five levels:

Auto Light Sensitivity

Multi-Information Display

120 2009 RL

To exit AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the headlight auto light sensitivity setup.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

121 2009 RL

AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

There are five settings to choose from in the door/window setup:

While CUSTOMIZE GROUP is shown on the multi-information display, select DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, and then press the SEL/ RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button, until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

DOOR LOCK MODE KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT

Door/Window Setup

Multi-Information Display

122

see page 123

see page 125

see page 127

see page 129

see page 131 Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

2009 RL

There are three settings you can choose from:

SHIFT FROM P The doors lock whenever you move the shift lever out of Park.

WITH VEH SPD The doors lock when the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (about 15 km/h).

OFF The auto door lock mode is deactivated all the time.

While DOOR/WINDOW SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. You will see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Auto Door Lock

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

123 2009 RL

To exit AUTO DOOR LOCK without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the auto door lock setup.

Multi-Information Display

124 2009 RL

There are three settings you can choose from:

While DOOR/WINDOW SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

SHIFT TO P The drivers door or all the doors, depending on the door lock mode setting (see page ), unlock when you move the shift lever to Park.

IGN OFF The drivers door or all the doors, depending on the door lock mode setting (see page ), unlock when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

OFF The auto door unlock mode is deactivated all the time.

127

127

CONTINUED

Auto Door Unlock

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

125 2009 RL

To exit AUTO DOOR UNLOCK without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the auto door unlock setup.

Multi-Information Display

126 2009 RL

While the multi-information display is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select DRIVER DOOR or ALL DOORS by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button to enter your selection.

To select whether the drivers door unlocks or all the doors unlock when you unlock the doors with the remote, follow these instructions.

CONTINUED

Door Lock Mode

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

127 2009 RL

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

To exit DOOR LOCK MODE without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, and then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the door lock mode setup.

Multi-Information Display

128 2009 RL

When you press the LOCK button on the remote to lock the doors and the trunk, and then press the button again within 5 seconds, a beeper sounds once and the exterior lights blink once to verify that the doors are locked and the security system is set.

While the multi-information display is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

When you press the UNLOCK button on the remote to unlock the doors, the exterior lights blink twice to verify that the doors are unlocked and the security system is turned off.

To turn this feature on or off, follow these instructions.

CONTINUED

Keyless Lock Acknowledgement

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

129 2009 RL

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the keyless lock acknowledgment setup.

To exit KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

Multi-Information Display

130 2009 RL

When you unlock the doors by pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote, or by touching either front door handle while carrying the remote, but do not open any door, the doors relock and the security system sets within 30 seconds. To change the relock time, follow these instructions.

While the multi-information display is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select the relock time you want (90, 60, or 30 seconds) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Security Relock Timer

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

131 2009 RL

To exit SECURITY RELOCK TIMER without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the security relock timer setup.

Multi-Information Display

132 2009 RL

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select WIPER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button.

The changeable setting under WIPER SETUP is called WIPER ACTION. To get into WIPER ACTION, do this:

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see WIPER ACTION, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Wiper Setup

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

133

see page 134

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

2009 RL

You can select from these two settings when the wiper switch is in the INT (intermittent) position:

While the multi-information display is in the WIPER SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select INTERMITTENT or WITH VEH SPD by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button to enter your selection.

INTERMITTENT The intermittent operation varies according to the selection you make on the wiper levers intermittent control ring.

WITH VEH SPD The intermittent operation varies according to vehicle speed.

Wiper Action

Multi-Information Display

134 2009 RL

To exit WIPER ACTION without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this happens, you need to repeat the wiper action setup.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

135 2009 RL

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

On models with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual. If equipped.

Canadian models only 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

136

MIRROR CONTROLS

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

PADDLE SHIFTERS

DISTANCE BUTTON

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS

HEADLIGHT WASHER SWITCH

COLLISION MITIGATION BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) OFF SWITCH

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

HORN

(P.138)

HEADLIGHTS/ TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS(P.140, 142)

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELD WIPER/ WASHER

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.35)

(P.137)

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK BUTTONS

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) BUTTONS

FRONT SEAT HEATER AND SEAT VENTILATION BUTTONS

MULTI INFORMATION DISPLAY BUTTONS

FRONT SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

(P.71) (P.145)

(P.162)

(P.148)

(P.356)

(P.278) (P.304) (P.182)

(P.181)/

(P.316)/

(P.162)

(P.147)/

(P.146)(P.146)

(P.328, 333)

(P.319, 324)

(P.409)

(P.422)

(P.436)

2

4

4

3

1

4

4

2009 RL

MIST OFF INT Intermittent LO Low speed HI High speed Windshield washers

Push the right lever up or down to select a position.

The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

The length of the wipe interval is varied automatically according to vehicle speed.

To change the WIPER ACTION setting, see page .

Vary the delay by turning the adjustment ring. If you turn it to the shortest delay ( position), the wipers change to low speed operation when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

134

CONTINUED

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

INT

Windshield Wipers and Washers Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

137

ADJUSTMENT RING

2009 RL

Pull back and hold the wiper control lever. The washers spray until you release the lever. The wipers run at low speed, then complete one more sweep after you release the lever.

When you activate the windshield washer with the headlights turned on, the headlight washer will be activated under certain conditions. For more information, see

section in the next column.

The headlight washers can be operated at any time by pressing the headlight washer button located next to the steering wheel column. The headlights must be turned on to use this button. In addition, the headlight washer operates without pressing the button at the first time you turn on the windshield washers after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

The headlight washers use the same fluid reservoir as the windshield washers.

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Windshield Washer Headlight Washers Canadian models only

Headlight Washers

138

HEADLIGHT WASHER SWITCH

2009 RL

The windshield wiper arms have two parked positions: winter and summer. In the winter position, the arms sit slightly above the edge of the hood. This reduces the possibility of damage to the wiper arms or windshield wiper motor by a build-up of snow and ice.

A heavy build-up of snow or ice on the wiper arms will cause them to automatically park in the winter position.

Adjust the wiper arms to the winter position by holding both arms as shown in the illustration at the same time. Pull on the arm, parallel to the windshield, until it locks in the higher position.

To return to the summer position, push the same area of both arms the other direction.

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Wiper Arm Positions

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

139

WIPER ARMS

Winter position

WIPER ARMS

Summer position HOLDING LOCATIONS

HOLDING LOCATIONS

2009 RL

Push down on the lever to signal a left turn and up to signal a right turn. To signal a lane change, push lightly on the lever, and hold it. The lever will return to center when you release it or complete a turn.

Turn signal Off Parking and indicator lights AUTO Headlights on High beams Flash high beams Fog lights off Fog lights on

The rotating switch on the left lever controls the lights. Turning this switch to the position turns on the parking lights, taillights, instrument panel lights, side-marker lights, and rear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the position turns on the headlights. If you leave the lights on with the ignition switch released after turned to the LOCK (0) position or when the built-in key is removed from the ignition switch, you will hear a reminder chime when you open the drivers door.

When the light switch is in the or position, the lights on indicator comes on as a reminder. This indicator stays on if you leave the light switch on and turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position.

To switch from low beams to high beams, push the left lever forward until you hear a click. The blue high beam indicator will come on (see page ). Pull it back to return to low beams. To flash the high beams, pull the lever back lightly, then release it. The high beams stay on as long as you hold the lever back.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

65

Turn Signal

Headlights High Beams

Turn Signals and Headlights

140 2009 RL

The automatic lighting feature is controlled by a sensor located on top of the dashboard. Do not cover this sensor or spill liquids on it.

Even with the automatic lighting feature turned on, we recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night or in a dense fog, or when you enter dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.To turn on automatic lighting, turn

the light switch to AUTO. The lights will come on automatically when the outside light level becomes low (at dusk, for example). The lights on indicator comes on as a reminder. The lights and indicator will turn off automatically when the system senses high ambient light.

To change the AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY setting, see page

.

The automatic lighting feature turns on the headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights when it senses low ambient light.

The lights will remain on when you turn off the ignition switch. They will turn off automatically when you open and close the drivers door. To turn them on again, either turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or turn the light switch to the position.

Do not leave the light switch in AUTO if you will not be driving the vehicle for an extended period (a week or more). You should also turn off the lights if you plan to leave the engine idling or off for a long time.

120

AUTO

Turn Signals and Headlights Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

141

LIGHT SENSOR

2009 RL

When the multi-information display shows a DRL OFF message, the daytime running lights are off. Follow the procedure in the left column to turn them on.

With the headlight switch off, the high beam headlights come on with reduced brightness when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and release the parking brake. They remain on until you turn the ignition switch off, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the switch.

If you see a CHECK DRL SYSTEM message on the multi- information display, there is a problem with the daytime running light system. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.

Turn the fog lights on and off by turning the switch next to the headlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only when the headlights are on low beam. With the light switch in the AUTO position, you can also use the fog lights when the headlights turn on automatically. They will go off when the headlights turn off.

Fog Lights Daytime Running Lights

Turn Signals and Headlights

142 2009 RL

This feature turns off the headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights within 15 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position and close the drivers door.

To change the HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER setting, see page .

The automatic lighting off feature activates if you leave the headlight switch in the or position or if the lights are turned on by setting the switch in the AUTO position, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, then open and close the drivers door.

If you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door and get out, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. With the drivers door open, you will hear a lights-on reminder chime.

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the drivers door.118

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Turn Signals and Headlights Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

143 2009 RL

If the AFS indicator comes on and starts blinking while driving, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, and turn off the engine. If the AFS indicator keeps blinking, or starts blinking again while driving after turning the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the AFS is not working properly (see page ). Have the AFS inspected by your dealer.

When the AFS indicator comes on, you will also see a CHECK ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM message on the multi- information display (see page ).

Without AFS, your vehicle still has normal lighting ability to continue driving.

The adaptive front lighting system (AFS) helps to improve visibility during nighttime driving. The AFS controls the aiming direction and lighting distribution of the low beams according to the amount of turn applied to the steering wheel during cornering or turning. Press the AFS OFF switch to turn the AFS on and off when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position and the headlights are turned on.

69

78

If equipped AFS Indicator

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)

144 2009 RL

This switch is at the right side of the left vent. Press it to turn the AFS on and off. When AFS is off, the AFS indicator comes on as a reminder when you turn on the headlights.

Here are some operating characteristics of the AFS:

The system requires an initialization period. It does not begin to operate until you have driven the vehicle a short distance.

At a stop, the right headlight turns right when you turn the steering wheel to the right. But the left headlight does not turn left when you turn the steering wheel to the left. This prevents the left headlight from pointing at oncoming traffic.

AFS is turned off when the shift lever is in the R position.

The AFS works with the automatic headlight adjusting system to sense changes in vehicle height due to driving and loading conditions of passengers and luggage, and adjusts the vertical aim of the low beam headlights automatically to compensate for load.

If the headlights do not seem to be properly aimed, have the automatic headlight adjusting system inspected by your dealer.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the AFS is turned on if it was on previously.

AFS Off Switch Automatic Headlight Adjusting System

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

145

AFS OFF SWITCH

2009 RL

Push the button between the center vents to turn on the hazard warning lights (four-way flashers). This causes all four outside turn signals and both indicators in the instrument panel to flash. Use the hazard warning lights if you need to park in a dangerous area near heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

Adjust the brightness of the instrument panel by pressing the or button. Press the button to increase the brightness and the button to decrease it. The brightness can be set differently for when the headlights are on, and when they are off.

The level of brightness is shown on the multi-information display while you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds after you finish adjusting.

Instrument Panel BrightnessHazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning Button, Instrument Panel Brightness

146

ADJUSTMENT BUTTON CANADAU.S.

2009 RL

The rear window defogger clears fog, frost, and thin ice from the window. Push the defogger button to turn it on and off. Pushing this button also turns the mirror heaters on and off. The indicator in the button comes on to show the defogger is on. If you do not turn it off, the defogger will shut itself off after 5 to 40 minutes (depending on the ambient temperature). It also shuts off when you turn off the ignition switch. You

have to turn it on again when you restart the vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clear and you have good visibility before starting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires on the inside of the rear window can be accidentally damaged. When cleaning the glass, always wipe side to side.

To reduce glare at night, the instrument panel illumination dims when you turn the light switch to

or . To cancel the glare reduction function, set the brightness to the highest level, then press the button. You will hear a beep when it is canceled.

Rear Window Defogger

Instrument Panel Brightness, Rear Window Defogger Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

147

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

2009 RL

Make any steering wheel adjustment before you start driving.

Move the steering wheel in, out, up, or down by pushing and holding the adjustment switch in that direction.

Release the switch when the steering wheel reaches the desired position. Make sure the steering wheel points towards your chest, not toward your face, and that you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators.

Steering Wheel Adjustments

148

Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

2009 RL

When you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position and release it, or remove the built-in key from the ignition switch, the steering wheel automatically moves fully in and up.

Steering wheel movement is also controlled by the driving position memory system (see page ).

To change the AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC setting, see page

.

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, or the fuse for the power tilt and telescopic steering wheel is removed, the power tilt and telescopic steering wheel system needs to be reset when you reconnect the battery or install the fuse.

The steering wheel returns to its original position when you push the ignition switch or insert the built-in key back in the ignition switch. Push the ignition switch for more

than 1 second and release it, or insert the built-in key into the ignition switch, and remove it. The steering wheel automatically moves fully in and up to let you know the system is reset.

106

163

Steering Wheel Adjustments Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

149 2009 RL

You should have received a key number tag with your keys. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

Protect the keys from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries. Do not try to take them apart.

The built-in key (see page ) fits all the locks on your vehicle.

These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated by the immobilizer system. They will not work to start the engine if the circuits are damaged.

180

Keys and Locks

150

KEY NUMBER TAGBUILT-IN KEYS

2009 RL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the immobilizer system indicator should come on for a few seconds, then go out. If the indicator starts to blink, it means the system does not recognize the coding of the Honda smart key or built-in key. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, release the ignition switch and push it, or remove the built-in key, and reinsert it. Then turn the switch to the ON (II) position again.

The system may not recognize your keys coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e. key fob) is near the ignition switch when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of your remote or built-in key, contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable.

If you have lost your remote or built-in key and cannot start the engine, contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, the engine will not start.

Immobilizer System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

151

Always take the keyless access remote and built-in key with you whenever you leave the vehicle alone.

2009 RL

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY (I), ON (II), and START (III).

Use this position only to start the engine. The switch returns to the ON (II) position when you let go of the ignition switch.

To use the built-in key, you have to remove the cover (see page ).

This is the normal ignition switch position when driving. Several of the indicators on the instrument panel come on as a test when you turn the ignition switch from the ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) position.

If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may make it difficult to turn the ignition switch. Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or right as you turn the ignition switch.

You can insert or remove the built-in key only in this position. To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, the shift lever must be in Park, and you must push the knob or built-in key in

slightly.

The shift lever must be in Park before you turn the ignition switch knob to the LOCK (0) position or remove the built-in key from the ignition switch.

You can operate the audio system and the accessory power sockets in this position.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, an ACCESSORY (I) POSITION message is shown on the multi- information display.

If you open the drivers door and leave the key in the ignition switch, you will hear a reminder beeper, and a message appears on the multi- information display according to the ignition switch position. When the ignition switch is in the ACC (I) position, a RETURN IGNITION SWITCH TO LOCK (0) POSITION message is shown on the multi- information display. When the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) position, a REMOVE KEY message is shown on the multi- information display.

180

START (III)

ON (II) LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

Ignition Switch

152

IGNITION SWITCH

COVER

BUILT-IN KEY

2009 RL

Each door has a lock tab above the inside door handle. Pull the tab to lock the door and push it to unlock. When you pull the tab on the drivers door, all the doors lock.

To lock any door when getting out of the vehicle, pull the lock tab and close the door.

All doors can be locked from the outside by using the built-in key in the drivers door. To unlock only the drivers door, insert the built-in key, turn it clockwise, and release it. The remaining doors unlock when you turn the built-in key a second time within a few seconds.

Each front door has a power door lock master switch. Either switch locks and unlocks all doors. Push the switch down to lock all doors and up to unlock them.

To change the DOOR UNLOCK MODE setting, see page .

When the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, all the doors lock automatically.

When you shift to P after driving, the drivers door unlocks.

To change the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK setting, see page .

With the drivers door open and the built-in key in the ignition, both master door lock switches are disabled. They are not disabled if the drivers door is closed. Pushing the switch down on the open front passengers door will lock all doors. If you try to lock an open drivers door by pulling the lock tab rearward with the remote inside the vehicle and closing the drivers door, the drivers door will unlock.

To change the AUTO DOOR LOCK setting, see page .

109

125

123

Lockout Prevention

Door Locks Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

153

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

2009 RL

If your vehicles battery goes dead or is disconnected, you can open the trunk from the rear seat by pulling the trunk release handle. Reach the handle through the trunk pass- through.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging the lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See

on page .

You can open the trunk in any of four ways:

If the doors are locked, press the trunk release switch on the trunk lid with the remote in keyless access operating range.

To close the trunk, press down on the trunk lid.

Press the trunk release button on the drivers door.

Press and hold the trunk release button on the remote.

If the doors are unlocked, press the trunk release switch on the trunk lid. 56

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Trunk

154

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

2009 RL

As a safety feature, your vehicle has a release lever on the right corner in the trunk so the trunk can be opened from the inside. To open the trunk, push the release lever to the left.

Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.

For more information about child safety, see page .

To protect items in the trunk, you can disable the trunk-release button on the drivers door, the trunk lid, and the remote. To do this, turn off the trunk main switch in the glove box, lock the glove box, and lock the trunk pass-through cover with the built-in key.

The childproof door locks are designed to prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. Each rear door has a lock lever near the edge. With the lever in the LOCK position, the door cannot be opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. To open the door, push the lock tab in, and use the outside door handle.

42

Childproof Door LocksEmergency Trunk Opener

Trunk, Childproof Door Locks Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

155

LEVER

TRUNK MAIN SWITCH

lock

unlock

RELEASE LEVER

2009 RL

Moves the seat forward and backward.

The controls for the power adjustable front seats are on the outside edge of each seat bottom. You can adjust the seats with the ignition switch in any position. Make all seat adjustments before you start driving.

Moves the front of the seat up or down.

Raises or lowers the seat.

Moves the whole seat up and forward, or down and backward. The front of the seat also tilts up or down at the same time.

Adjusts the seat-back angle forward or backward.

Increases or decreases the lumbar support.

See pages for important safety information and warnings about how to properly position the seats and seat- backs.

15 16 Front Seat Power Adjustments

Seats

156 2009 RL

See page for important safety information and a warning about improperly positioning head restraints.

16

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has adjustable head restraints on the front seats. The front head restraints adjust for

height. You need both hands to adjust a restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it while driving. To raise it, pull upward. To lower the restraint, push the release button sideways, and push the restraint down.

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions to help protect you and your passengers from whiplash and other injuries.

They are most effective when you adjust them so the center of the back of the occupants head rests against the center of the restraint.

Head Restraints

Seats

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

157

FRONT

RELEASE BUTTON

CUSHION

LEGS SEAT-BACK

2009 RL

To remove a head restraint for cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as it will go. Push the release button, then pull the restraint out of the seat- back.

When reinstalling a head restraint, put the legs back in place. Then adjust it to the appropriate height while pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locks in position when you reinstall it.

You can raise the rear head restraints by hand.

To lower the rear head restraints for better visibility, press the rear head restraint tilt button on the ceiling console with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.

Seats

Removing the Head Restraint

158

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON

REAR

Failure to reinstall the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

2009 RL

The drivers and front passengers seats have active head restraints. If the vehicle is struck severely from the rear, the occupant properly secured with the seat belt will be pushed against the seat-back and the head restraint will automatically move forward.

This reduces the distance between the restraint and the occupants head. It also helps protect the occupants

against whiplash and injuries to the neck and upper spine.

After a collision, the activated restraint should return to its normal position.

For a head restraint system to work properly:

Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs.

Do not place any object between an occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its proper location.

If the restraints do not return to their normal position, or in the event of a severe collision, have the vehicle inspected by an Acura dealer.

Only use genuine Acura replacement head restraints.

Active Head Restraints

Seats Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

159 2009 RL

The rear seat armrest is in the center of the rear seat. Pivot it down to use it.

To open the cover, pull down the rear seat armrest. Pull on the tab at the top of the inner partition, and press on the button to fully release the cover. To close the cover, swing it up, and push firmly on the top. Make sure it latches properly.

Make sure all items in the trunk and those extending through the pass- through are secured.

For security, this cover can be locked and unlocked only with the built-in key. To lock the cover, insert the key, and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open and the trunk lid open.

See on page .56

Rear Seat Armrest Trunk Pass-through Cover

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Seats

160

COVER

KNOB

2009 RL

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

The inside mirror can automatically darken to reduce glare. To turn on this feature, press the button on the bottom of the mirror. The AUTO indicator comes on as a reminder. When it is on, the mirror darkens when it senses the headlights of a vehicle behind you, then returns to normal visibility when the lights are gone. Press the button again to turn off this feature.

Move the selector switch to L (drivers side) or R (passengers side).

Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to move the mirror right, left, up, or down.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

161

INDICATOR

AUTO BUTTON

SENSOR

SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

2009 RL

The outside mirrors are heated to remove fog and frost. With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, turn on the heaters by pressing the button. The indicator in the button comes on as a reminder. Press the button again to turn the heaters off. Pressing this button also turns the rear window defogger on and off.

When you finish, move the selector switch to the center (off) position. This turns off the adjustment switch so you cant move a mirror out of position by accidentally bumping the switch.

Outside mirror positions can be stored in the driving position memory system (see page ).

Both outside door mirrors have a reverse tilt feature. When in reverse, the selected mirror will tilt down slightly to improve your view as you parallel park. Shifting out of reverse will return the mirror to its original position.

To tilt the drivers mirror, place the selector switch in the left position.

To tilt the passengers mirror, place the switch in the right position.

To turn the feature off, place the switch in the center position.

3.

163

Power Mirror HeatersReverse Tilt Door Mirror

Mirrors

162

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

2009 RL

CONTINUED

Store a driving position only when the vehicle is parked.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. You cannot add a new driving position to the memory unless the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. You can recall a memorized position with the ignition switch in any position.

Adjust the seat to a comfortable position (see page ). Adjust the steering wheel to a comfortable position (see page

). Adjust the outside mirrors for best visibility (see page ).

Your vehicle has a memory feature for the steering wheel, drivers seat, and outside mirror positions.

Two seat, steering wheel, and outside mirror positions can be stored in separate memories. You select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate button.

If you do not turn the heaters off, they will shut themselves off after 5 to 40 minutes (depending on the ambient temperature). It also shuts off when you turn off the ignition switch.

You can also select the memorized positions by unlocking the doors with the remote. Each remote has a drivers ID (see page ). The drivers ID (Driver 1) corresponds to the memorised positions stored with the memory button (1). The drivers ID (Driver 2) corresponds to the memorized positions stored with the memory button (2).

1.

2.

148

156173

161

Storing a Driving Position in Memory

Driving Position Memory System

Mirrors, Driving Position Memory System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

163 2009 RL

Press the desired memory button (1 or 2) until you hear a beep.

Make sure the shift lever is in Park.

To select a memorized position, do this:

To cancel the storing procedure after pressing the MEMO button:

Do not press a memory button within 5 seconds.

Readjust the seat or steering position.

Readjust the outside mirror position.

Each memory button stores only one driving position. Storing a new position erases the previous setting stored in that buttons memory.

All stored driving positions will be lost if your vehicles battery goes dead or is disconnected.

Press the MEMO button on the drivers door. You will hear a beep. The indicator in the memory buttons (1 and 2) will blink. Immediately press one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two beeps. The indicator in the memory button will stay on. The current positions of the drivers seat, steering wheel, and outside mirrors are now stored.

1.

2.

3.

Driving Position Memory System

Selecting a Memorized Position

164

MEMORY BUTTONS

MEMORY BUTTONS

MEMO BUTTON

2009 RL

You can use the adjustment switches to change the positions of the seat, steering wheel, or outside mirrors after they are in their memorized position. If you change the memorized position, the indicator in the memory button will go out. To keep this driving position for later use, you must store it in the driving position memory.

To stop the systems automatic adjustment, do any of the following:

Press any button on the control panel: MEMO, 1, or 2.

If you select a memorized position without pushing the ignition switch knob or inserting the built-in key in the ignition switch, only the seat and outside mirrors will adjust. To get the system to also adjust the steering wheel, push and turn the ignition switch or insert the built-in key in the ignition switch. You will hear two beeps when it is complete.

Push any of the adjustment switches for the seat or steering wheel.

Shift out of Park.

Adjust the outside mirrors.

The system will move the seat, steering wheel, and outside mirrors to the memorized positions. The indicator in the selected memory button will flash during movement. When the adjustments are complete, you will hear two beeps, and the indicator will remain on.

To change the MEMORY POSITION LINK setting, see page

.104

Driving Position Memory System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

165 2009 RL

Your vehicle has a keyless access system. When you carry the remote with you, you can lock/unlock the door(s), unlock the trunk, and start the engine without using the built-in key.

The system may not work if: The battery of the remote is weak.

You carry a cell phone, a laptop computer, or other electrical device near the remote.

There is strong electrical current nearby.

The remote is covered by metal. A vehicle is being operated with a transmitter nearby. When the remote battery is dead.

Protect the remote and the built-in key from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.

Always keep the remote and the built-in key away from any magnetic material.

You should have received a key number tag with your built-in key. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

When the vehicle battery is dead.

Make sure the driver always carries the remote/built-in key set.

Do not drop the remote or the built-in key, and do not set heavy objects on them.

The built-in keys do not contain batteries.

Keep the remote and the built-in key away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.

Keyless Access System

166 2009 RL

This remote is used to lock/unlock

the doors and unlock the trunk. When you carry the remote, you can lock/unlock the doors, unlock the trunk, and start the engine without a key.

You can lock/unlock the doors within about a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from the outside door handle.

The following keys come with your vehicle. Refer to page for how to separate the keys.

This key is used to lock/unlock the doors, glove box, trunk pass-through cover, and to start the engine (after you remove the ignition switch cover, see page ). You can open the trunk within about

a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from the trunk release switch.

Anyone can lock/unlock a door or open the trunk if the remote is within the operating range of the door or the trunk.

The remote may not work if: It is too close to the vehicle. It is above or below the vehicle, even when it is within its operating range.

180

177

Keys

Built-in Key

Keyless Access Remote

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

167

BUILT-IN KEYS

OPERATING RANGE

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTES

KEY NUMBER TAG

2009 RL

The handle of each front door has a sensor. That sensor works with the remote so you can automatically unlock/lock the door(s).

To change the DOOR UNLOCK MODE setting, see page .

When you unlock the door(s), some exterior lights blink twice and the system beeps twice.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH setting, see page

.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP setting, see page .

By default, only the drivers door unlocks when you grab its handle.

All the doors unlock when you grab the handle of the front passengers door.

If you wear a glove while grabbing a front door handle, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.

If you do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, they will automatically relock.

To change the SECURITY RELOCK TIMER setting, see page

.

If a remote is within operating range while you wash your vehicle or when it is raining heavily, the door sensors may respond by unlocking the doors.

The unlock sensors do not operate when:

The remote is not within the operating range.

The remote is too close to the vehicle.

When the doors are unlocked.

The remote battery is dead.

The vehicle battery is dead. 109

111

113

131

Unlocking the Door(s)

Keyless Access System

168 2009 RL

Each front door has a LOCK/ UNLOCK feature.

When you touch the door lock sensor of the front door by hand, all the doors and the trunk will lock.

The lock sensors do not operate if:

When you lock the doors, some exterior lights blink once and the

system beeps once. When you cannot set the security system because the trunk or hood is open, no exterior light blinks and/or no beeper sounds.

Before locking the doors, make sure the remote is not inside the vehicle.

If a remote is within operating range while you wash your vehicle or when it is raining heavily, the door sensors may respond by locking the doors.

Within 2 seconds of touching the handle to lock the doors or locking the doors with remote, pull the handle to make sure the doors are actually locked. The door unlock sensors do not operate for about 2 seconds after the doors are locked.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP setting, see page .

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH setting, see page

.

If you touch the door lock sensor of the front door with your hand wearing a glove, the door sensor may delay to respond or not respond by locking the doors.

The remote is not within the operating range.

The doors are open.

The ignition switch is not in the LOCK (0) position.

The built-in key is in the ignition switch.

The remote is too close to the vehicle.

The remote battery is dead.

The vehicle battery is dead.

111

113

CONTINUED

Locking the Doors

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

169

DOOR LOCK SENSOR

2009 RL

Before closing the trunk, make sure the remote is not in the trunk.

If you close the trunk when the remote is in it, the system beeps, and the trunk reopens.

When you close the trunk with all doors locked, the trunk will lock.

When you unlock all the doors with the remote, built-in key or power door lock master switch, the trunk will unlock.

Use the pull handle when you close the trunk.

If you open a door, pull its lock tab, and shut it when the remote is inside the vehicle, the drivers door will unlock. Make sure you carry the remote with you when you lock the doors.

Locking the TrunkDoor Lock Prevention

Keyless Access System

170

PULL HANDLE

2009 RL

The trunk cannot be locked if:

When the trunk is locked, you can open it in any of these ways:

Press this button once to lock all doors. Some exterior lights will flash. When you push the LOCK button twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a beep to verify that the doors are locked and the security system is set.

Pull the trunk release switch when carrying the remote (the system beeps once).

Press the trunk button on the remote.

Press the trunk release button inside the vehicle.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging the lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See

on page .

The remote is too close to the seat-back of the rear seat or the seat cushion.

The remote is on the interior rear panel.

The remote is too close to the trunk lid.

56

CONTINUED

Locking and Unlocking the Trunk Keyless Access Remote

LOCK Carbon

Monoxide Hazard

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

171

LED

UNLOCK BUTTON

PANIC BUTTON

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

LOCK BUTTON

TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

2009 RL

To change the SECURITY RELOCK TIMER setting, see page

.

Press this button for about 1 second to open the trunk. You cannot open the trunk if the built-in key is in the ignition or the ignition switch is in any position except the LOCK (0) position. You cannot open the trunk with the remote if the trunk main switch is turned off.

To change the KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT setting, see page .

Press this button for about 2 seconds to attract attention: the horn will sound and the exterior lights will flash for about 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, press any other button on the remote.

You cannot lock the doors if any door, the trunk, or the hood is not fully closed if the built-in key is in the ignition switch, or if the ignition switch is in any position except the LOCK (0) position.

Press this button once to unlock the drivers door. Press it twice to unlock the other doors. Some exterior lights will flash twice each time you press the button. The ceiling light (if the ceiling light switch is in the DOOR position) will come on when you press the UNLOCK button. If you do not open any doors within 30 seconds, the ceiling light fades out. If you relock the doors with the remote before 30 seconds have elapsed, the ceiling light will go off immediately.

If you unlock the doors with the remote, but do not open any doors within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.

To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME, see page .

To change the DOOR LOCK MODE setting, see page .

When you cannot set the security system because the trunk or hood is open, no exterior light blinks and/or no beeper sounds.

131

127

116

129

TRUNK

PANIC

UNLOCK

Keyless Access System

172 2009 RL

Here are the settings activated with the remote:

Driving position memory (see page ).

Audio system settings (see page ).

Customized settings (see page ).

Climate control settings (see page ).

When you unlock the door with your remote, each remote activates the keyless memory settings related to that remote. The drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back of each remote.

Compass system preferences (see page ).

To turn off this feature, press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time. The LED

in the remote will blink once. Then release the buttons. Doing this cancels the keyless memory settings for that remote and restores the default settings.

Navigation system preferences (see the navigation system manual).

Some of them keep the same settings as they were set previously.

To turn the keyless memory settings back on, repeat this procedure. The LED will blink twice to indicate the feature has been turned on.

If you lose a transmitter, the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer.

Do not immerse the transmitter in any liquid.

Protect the transmitter from extreme temperature.

Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter.

81

163

213

205

281

U.S. RL model

Except U.S. RL model

Keyless Memory Settings

Remote Transmitter Care

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

173

DRIVERS ID

TM

2009 RL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Replace the batteries if necessary. Battery type: CR2025

Remove the built-in key.

Remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a coin.

Replace the old batteries with new batteries. Place the batteries so the

side is facing up. Snap the two halves of the remote case back together.

An improperly disposed of battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacing the Remote Battery

Keyless Access System

174 2009 RL

The engine may not run, and some malfunctions may occur, if the remote is:

The engine may not start if the remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Also, the engine may not start if the remote is too close to the windows.

Outside the vehicle. On the dashboard. On the rear interior panel. In the glove box. In the door pockets. In the trunk, etc.

Ignition Switch Operating Range

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

175

Make sure you know where the remote is when you are inside the vehicle.

Remember that you can start the engine without using the built-in key when the remote is inside the vehicle.

Make sure you always carry the remote with you.

2009 RL

When you push the ignition switch, the remote and the vehicle recognize each other. After the recognition, the remote indicator flashes, and a beeper sounds once. After the beep, turn the ignition switch. When the remote is out of the operating range, the ignition switch is locked. If the ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK (0) position to the ACCESSORY (I) position after

the beep, the steering wheel is locked. To unlock the steering wheel, turn it right and left while turning the ignition switch at the same time. If the remote and the vehicle do not recognize each other, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, remove the ignition switch cover, insert the built-in key, and turn the switch (see pages and

). Before leaving the vehicle, make sure the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) position.

You will also see a RETURN IGNITION SWITCH TO LOCK (0) POSITION message on the multi- information display.

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, put the transmission in Park, press the switch in, and turn it to the LOCK (0) position. When the transmission is not in Park, you cannot turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

If you open the drivers door with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position, a beeper will sound.

152 177

Ignition Switch

Keyless Access System

176 2009 RL

When you are pressing the ignition switch, or when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, the beeper sounds if you take the remote out of the vehicle and close the door.

To remove the ignition switch cover, insert the built-in key (see page ), then pull the cover out by pulling the built-in key while pushing it.

Also, if you close the door when the ignition switch is not in the LOCK (0) position and the remote is not inside the vehicle, the keyless access alarm sounds outside the vehicle, a message appears on the multi- information display, and the beeper sounds if the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.

When the beeper sounds after you close the drivers door outside the vehicle, check the position of the ignition switch and the location of the remote.

If the engine is running and you remove the remote from the vehicle, it will continue to run. But once turned to the LOCK (0) position, the engine will not restart until a remote is brought back into the vehicle.

180

CONTINUED

Beeper and MessageRemoving the Ignition Switch Cover Keyless Remote Not Detected

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

177

BUILT-IN KEY

IGNITION SWITCH COVER

push

pull

2009 RL

The batteries in the remote normally last about 2 years. To ensure maximum battery life, do not store the remote close to electrical devices such as computers or TVs. When the multi-information display shows KEYLESS REMOTE LOW BATTERY, replace the batteries as soon as possible (see page ).

The engine does not restart if you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position when the remote is outside the vehicle. Check where the remote is. Make sure that you carry the remote or built-in key with you when you operate the ignition switch.

When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, the multi- information display shows KEYLESS REMOTE NOT DETECTED, and the inside and outside beepers sound. The multi-information display message goes away when you bring the remote back inside the vehicle, and close the door or apply the parking brake.

The outside beeper sounds when the ignition switch is in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position.

If the engine is running and you remove the remote from the vehicle, it will continue to run. Once turned to the LOCK (0) position, the engine will not restart until a remote is brought back into the vehicle.

If you pass the remote through an open window, the system does not respond. Also, even when the remote is inside the vehicle, the beeper may sound when the location of the remote is not detected due to surrounding conditions. It is not a failure. Make sure that you carry the remote with you.

174

Keyless Remote Low Battery

Keyless Access System

178 2009 RL

The keyless access system indicator comes on and stays on while you are driving.

The indicator comes on for several seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. Have your vehicle checked by your dealer if:

In this case, use the built-in key to lock/unlock the doors and start the engine.

The multi-information display shows CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM.

The indicator comes on with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.

Check Keyless Access System

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

179

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR

2009 RL

To remove the built-in key, pull it out while pressing the release button. To reinstall the built-in key, push the key into the remote until it clicks.

The trunk and glove box cannot be opened when you turn the trunk main switch off and lock the glove box and trunk pass-through cover with the built-in key. Also, the trunk cannot be opened by using the remote.

The keyless access system uses an electric field to identify the remote.

To avoid damaging the remote and the built-in key, never pull on the built-in key unless you are pressing the release button.

If you use medical equipment such as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your doctor if the radio waves used by the remote will affect it.

Valet FunctionBuilt-in key and Remote

Keyless Access System

180

RELEASE BUTTON

BUILT-IN KEY

2009 RL

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously. It does not cycle with temperature changes.

Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat the seats quickly, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery.

If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters, even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting.

The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use the heaters. Push the top of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select LO by pushing the bottom of the switch. This will keep the seat warm.

In the HI setting, the heater turns off when the seat gets warm, and turns back on after the seats temperature drops.

Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters. The passenger seat only has heaters in the seat bottom because of the side airbag cutoff system.

RL models

Front Seat Heaters Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

181

Passengers seat

Drivers seat

HEATERS FRONT SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

HI

LOW

2009 RL

When you press the button once, the heater is set to HI. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select MID or LOW by pressing the

button. This will keep the seat warm. To shut down the heater, press the button until the indicators go off.

In HI, when the seat gets warm, the heater will change to MID after about 5 minutes.

In MID, the heater will change to LOW after about 60 minutes.

In LOW, the heater runs continuously.

The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use the heaters and the air ventilation system.

HI Three indicators on. MID Two indicators on. LO One indicator on. OFF All indicators off.

To use the heaters, press the button. The indicator (red) next to the button will come on. There are four settings in the heaters:

Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters and an air ventilation system. The passenger seat only has heaters in the seat bottom because of the side airbag system.

If equipped

Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation

182

BUTTON INDICATORS

passengers seat

Drivers seatHEATERS

FRONT SEAT HEATER AND SEAT VENTILATION SWITCHES

BUTTON

2009 RL

Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation:

Use the HI setting only to heat or to ventilate the seats quickly, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery.

If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters or the seat ventilation, even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting.

When you press the button once, the system is set to HI. To change to the lower mode, press the button. To turn the air ventilation off, press the button until the indicators go off.

HI Three indicators on. MID Two indicators on. LO One indicator on. OFF All indicators off.

To ventilate the seat, press the button. The indicator (blue) next to the button will come on. The air ventilation system has four settings:

Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

183 2009 RL

The outer rear seat cushions and seat-backs are equipped with seat heaters.

The rear seat heater switches are located under the rear vents. The left (right) switch controls the seat heaters on left (right) outer seating position.

If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat the seats quickly, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery.

Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters:

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously. It does not cycle with temperature changes.

In the HI setting, the heater turns off when the seat gets warm, and turns back on after the seats temperature drops.

The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use seat heaters. Push the right side of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select LO by pushing the left side of the switch. This will

keep the seat warm.

Rear Seat Heaters (Canadian models)

184

HEATERS For right outer seating position

HEATERS For left outer seating position

LOW HI

REAR SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

2009 RL

If the MAIN switch is pushed down (OFF), the passenger windows cannot be raised or lowered. Keep the MAIN switch off when you have children in the vehicle so they do not injure themselves by operating the windows unintentionally.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before operating any of the window switches. To open a window, push the switch down and hold it. To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it. Release the switch to stop the window.

CONTINUED

Power Windows Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

185

DRIVERS WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

2009 RL

Auto reverse stops sensing when the window is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the window before closing it.

To open the window fully, push the window switch firmly down to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes down all the way. To stop the window from going all the way down, pull back on the window switch briefly.

To close the window fully, pull back the window switch firmly to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes all the way up. To stop the window from going all the way up, push down on the window switch briefly.

To open or close the window partially, push down or pull back on the window switch lightly to the first detent, and hold it. The window will stop when you release the switch.

All window switches also have the AUTO feature.

If the window runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the window, remove the obstacle, then use the window switch again.

The indicators in the switches come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

The power windows have a key-off delay. You can still open and close the windows for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch. The key-off delay cancels as soon as you open either front door. You must then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position for the power windows to operate.

Auto Reverse

AUTO

Power Windows

186 2009 RL

You can open all of the windows and the moonroof from outside with the remote.

Press the UNLOCK button once to unlock the drivers door.

To open the windows and moonroof further, press the button again and hold it. If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 1 and 2.

You cannot close the windows or the moonroof with the remote.

You can open and close the windows and moonroof with the built-in key in the drivers door lock.

Insert the built-in key in the drivers door lock.

To open:

Turn the key clockwise, then release it.

Turn the built-in key clockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and moonroof, release the built-in key.

Press the UNLOCK button a second time, and hold it. All the doors unlock, and all four windows and moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and moonroof, release the button.

When the windows or moonroof stops before opening fully, to open the windows and moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 10 seconds).

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Opening the Windows and Moonroof with the Remote

Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Built-in Key

Power Windows Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

187

Open

Close

UNLOCK BUTTON

2009 RL

To close: Insert the built-in key in the drivers door lock.

If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Turn the key counterclockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to close. To stop the windows and the moonroof, release the key.

Turn the key counterclockwise, then release it.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before operating the moonroof switch on the ceiling console. To open the moonroof, pull back the moonroof switch. To close the moonroof, push the moonroof switch forward. Release the switch to stop the moonroof.

To open the moonroof fully, pull back the moonroof switch firmly. The moonroof opens all the way. To stop the moonroof from opening fully, push the switch briefly.

To close the windows and moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 10 seconds).

1.

2.

3.

4.

Opening/Closing the Moonroof with the Ceiling Console Switch

Power Windows, Moonroof

188

NOTE:

MOONROOF SWITCH

2009 RL

To open or close the moonroof partially, pull back or push forward on the moonroof switch lightly to the first detent, and hold it. The moonroof will stop when you release the switch.

To tilt the moonroof, push the center of the moonroof switch straight up. To stop the moonroof from tilting fully open, push the moonroof switch forward.

To close the moonroof fully, push the moonroof switch forward to the second detent, then release it. The moonroof closes all the way. To stop the moonroof from closing all the way, push the switch briefly.

Moonroof Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

189

Opening or closing the moonroof on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

2009 RL

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof from the outside. Refer to page

for details.

The moonroof has a key-off delay. You can still open and close the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch. The key-off delay cancels as soon as you open either front door. You must then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position for the moonroof to operate.

If the moonroof runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the moonroof, remove the obstacle, then use the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the moonroof before closing it.

187

Operating the Moonroof with the Remote Transmitter or the Key

Auto Reverse

Moonroof

190

If you try to open the moonroof in below-f reezing temperatures, or when it is covered with snow or ice, you can damage the moonroof panel or its motor.

2009 RL

To apply the parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down with your foot. To release the parking brake, push on the pedal again. The parking brake indicator on the instrument panel should go out when the parking brake is fully released with the engine running (see page ).63

Parking Brake Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

191

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes, axles, and tires. A beeper will sound if the vehicle is put into gear with the parking brake on.

2009 RL

Interior Convenience Items

192

FRONT DOOR POCKET ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

GLOVE BOX/OWNERS MANUAL TRAY

UTILITY POCKET

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

INTEGRATED SUNSHADE

POWER REAR SUNSHADE

BEVERAGE HOLDER in REAR SEAT ARMREST BEVERAGE HOLDER

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK/ USB ADAPTER CABLE

2009 RL

Your vehicle has an owners manual tray inside the glove box. To open the tray, push the release button up.

Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Close it with a firm push. Lock or unlock the glove box with the built-in key.

To close the tray, push it up.

The glove box light comes on only when the parking lights are on.

Glove Box

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

193

RELEASE BUTTON

An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

2009 RL

For a short container, put the bottom plate down, and pull up the knob to use the separator.

For a long container, press the button in the beverage holder to raise the bottom plate. Stand the separator up.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. A spilled liquid that is very hot can scald you or your passengers. Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

To use the beverage holder, push the lid.

Beverage Holders

Interior Convenience Items

194

LID PressPull up

SEPARATOR

KNOB

BOTTOM PLATEBOTTOM PLATE BUTTON

2009 RL

To open the console compartment, pull up on the lever and lift the armrest.

To close, lower the armrest, and push it down until it latches.

You can put small items in the tray located in the console compartment lid. To use the tray, pull up on the lever, and lift the armrest pad.

The console compartment light is on when the light switch is in the

or position.

The rear beverage holder is in the rear seat armrest. Open the beverage holder by pulling up on the latch on the front.

Console Compartment

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

195

LEVER

LEVERLATCH

2009 RL

You can extend the sun visor further by pulling it back.

To use a sun visor, pull it down. You can also use a sun visor at the side window. Remove the support rod from the clip, and swing the sun visor toward the side window.

Do not use the sun visor extension feature over the rear view mirror.

Make sure to slide the sun visor back to its original position before flipping it back in place.

Make sure you put the sun visor back in place when you are getting into or out of the vehicle.

To use the vanity mirror on the back of the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The vanity mirror lights come on when you pull up the cover.

Sun Visors Vanity Mirror

Interior Convenience Items

196 2009 RL

The interior of each front door has an extendable pocket for maps and other small, lightweight items. For safety, be sure both front door pockets are closed while driving.

When the light switch is in the or position, the front door

pocket light is on.

The other socket is under the armrest in the console compartment storage area. To use the power socket, pull up the cover.

These sockets are intended to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).

They will not power an automotive type cigarette lighter element.

There are two accessory power sockets. One is located in the front of the center console. To use the power socket, push and release the lid.

Front Door PocketsAccessory Power Sockets

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

197

LID

LID Center console Console compartment

2009 RL

When you shift to reverse, the sunshade goes down automatically. To use it again, shift to another position, and push the button to raise it. If the sunshade stops while moving, check for and clear any obstacles, then push the button again.

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, push the power rear sunshade button on the ceiling console to raise the rear sunshade. Push the button again to lower it.

Power Rear Sunshade

Interior Convenience Items

198

POWER REAR SUNSHADE BUTTON

2009 RL

Each rear door has an integrated sunshade. To use a sunshade, hold the tab on the top, insert the sunshade into the holder, and pull the sunshade all the way up. Insert the holes on the sunshade into the hooks on the window frame.

To prevent the integrated sunshades from being unhooked due to winds, leave the rear windows closed while driving.

The hooks are intended for use only by the sunshades. Do not hang any other items on the hooks, as that could interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Integrated Sunshades

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

199

TAB

HOLEHOOK

HOLDER

2009 RL

After pushing the DOOR button, all the lights come on when you open any door, unlock the doors with the remote or built-in key, or turn the ignition switch from the ON (II) or the ACCESSORY (I) position to the LOCK (0) position. The indicator in the button comes on as a reminder.

The front and rear of the ceiling have ceiling lights.

To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME setting, see page

.

Push each ceiling light button to turn its light on and off.

Push the ON button to turn on all the ceiling lights. Push the OFF button to turn them off. 116

Ceiling Lights

Interior Lights

200

FRONT

REAR

CEILING LIGHT BUTTONS

CEILING LIGHT BUTTONS

OFF BUTTON

DOOR BUTTON

ON BUTTON

2009 RL

The courtesy light in each door comes on when the door is opened, and goes out when the door is closed.

Your vehicle also has a courtesy light in the ignition switch. This light comes on when you open the drivers door. It fades out in about 30 seconds after the door is closed.

The courtesy lights between the sun visors and on the rear ceiling light panel come on when you turn the parking lights on. To adjust its brightness, press either of the instrument panel brightness control buttons ( or ) (see page ).146

Courtesy Lights

Interior Lights Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

201

Front COURTESY LIGHTS

COURTESY LIGHTS

Rear

2009 RL

202 2009 RL

The climate control system in your vehicle provides a comfortable driving environment in all weather conditions.

The standard audio system has many features. This section describes those features and how to use them.

The climate control system and the audio system have a voice control feature.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system that requires a code number to enable it.

The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your vehicle.

...............Climate Control System . 204 ..............Climate Control Sensors . 212

................................Audio System . 213 ......Playing the AM/FM Radio . 214 ....AM/FM Radio Frequencies . 224

........AM/FM Radio Reception . 224 .................Adjusting the Sound . 226

Playing the XM Satellite ......................................Radio . 229

...Operating the Disc Changer . 236 ..........................Playing an iPod . 247

Playing a USB Flash Memory ....................................Device . 256

.....Playing a Bluetooth Audio . 265 ...Disc Changer Error Messages . 271

....................iPod Error Messages . 272 USB Flash Memory Device

........................Error Messages . 273 ..................Protecting Your Discs . 274

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 277 ................Remote Audio Controls . 278 .................Radio Theft Protection . 280

...........................Compass System . 281 ................Voice Control Basics . 304

......................Setting the Clock . 313 ............................Security System . 315

...............................Cruise Control . 316 ..Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . 319

HomeLink Universal ................................Transceiver . 334

......................................AcuraLink . 338 .......Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 355

...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 382

Features F

eatures

203 2009 RL

Climate Control System

204

RECIRCULATION BUTTON REAR

WINDOW DEFOGGER/ MIRROR HEATER BUTTON

U.S. models (Technology package model is shown)

INTERFACE DIAL

MODE BUTTON

A/C BUTTON

PASSENGERSS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL BAR

DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL BAR

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON

FAN CONTROL BUTTONSTEMPERATURE DISPLAY

2009 RL

Many climate control functions can still be controlled by standard buttons, dials, and knobs, but some functions can only be accessed using the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a knob and a selector.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

When you unlock the doors with your remote, the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the climate control settings are turned to the respective mode automatically when the ignition is turned to the ON (II) position.

The climate control system can also be operated by voice control.

Refer to Voice Control Basics for complete details (see page ).

See the Navi section in your Quick Start Guide for an overview of this system, and the Navigation System manual for complete details.

304

On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

Interface Dial Personalization Setting

Voice Control System

Climate Control System F

eatures

205

ENTER

SELECTOR

KNOB

2009 RL

To select the desired temperature, push the temperature control bar up or down.

Press the A/C button to view the climate control display. Pushing ENTER on the interface selector turns the air conditioning on and off. You will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, the system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set the temperature control below the outside temperature.

Press the button to increase the fan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease it.

To set the drivers and passengers temperature separately, push the temperature control bar up or down on the drivers or passengers side. The driver and passenger can each set the temperature to the desired setting.

Press the A/C button to view the climate control display, then turn the interface knob to increase or decrease the fan speed and airflow.

Using the Fan Control Buttons

Using the Interface Dial

Fan Control Temperature Control Bars Air Conditioning (A/C)

Climate Control System

206 2009 RL

The outside air intakes for the climate control system are at the base of the windshield. Keep this area clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in fresh air mode under almost all conditions. Keeping the system in recirculation mode, particularly with the A/C off, can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode when driving through dusty or smoky conditions, then return to fresh air mode.

This button turns the windshield defrost on and off.

You can select the vents air flows from. Some air will flow from the dashboard corner and side vents in all modes.

When you push this button, air flows from the defroster vents at the base of the windshield, and the system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. When the indicator in the button is on, the passengers temperature cannot be set separately from the drivers.

When the indicator in the button is on, air from the vehicles interior is sent throughout the system again. When the indicator is off, air is brought in from the outside of the vehicle (fresh air mode).

This button turns the rear window defogger on and off (see page ). Pushing this button also turns the power mirror heaters on and off.

147

CONTINUED

Recirculation Button Mode ControlWindshield Defroster Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Climate Control System F

eatures

207 2009 RL

When is selected, you can increase or decrease the temperature of airflow from the dashboard vent for the drivers side and the passengers side without changing the temperature of airflow from the floor vent.

Push the interface selector right or left, then turn the interface knob to select the desired temperature.

Air flows from the center and corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided between the vents in the dashboard and the floor vents.

Air flows from the floor vents.

Airflow is divided between the floor vents and defroster vents at the base of the windshield.

Use the mode control button to select the vents the air flows from. Some air will flow from the dashboard vents in all modes.

Press the A/C button to view the climate control display, then push the interface selector down. Select any of the modes by turning the interface knob.

Using the Mode Control Button

Using the Interface Dial

Climate Control System

208 2009 RL

The heater uses engine coolant to warm the air. If the engine is cold, it will be several minutes before you feel warm air coming from the system.

Select and fresh air mode. Set the fan to the desired speed. Adjust the warmth of the air with the temperature control bar.

you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning on the air conditioning, and setting the fan to maximum speed in fresh air mode.

Air conditioning places an extra load on the engine. Watch the engine coolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone, turn off the A/C until the gauge reading returns to normal.

The flow-through ventilation system draws in outside air, circulates it through the interior, then releases it through vents near the rear window.

Set the temperature to the lower limit. Make sure the A/C is off. Select and fresh air mode. Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2. 3. 4.

1. 2. 3.

70

If the interior is very warm,

CONTINUED

Climate Control System

Using the Heater

Using the A/C

Ventilation

F eatures

209 2009 RL

To remove fog from the inside of the windows:

Set the fan to the desired speed, or high for faster defrosting. Select . The system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. Adjust the temperature so the airflow feels warm. Select to help clear the rear window. To increase airflow to the windshield, close the corner vents.

When you switch to another mode from , the A/C setting returns to the previous setting (on or off). Select A/C, then press ENTER on the interface selector to turn the A/C off if it is on.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removes moisture from the air. When used in combination with the heater, it makes the interior warm and dry.

Switch the fan on. Turn on the air conditioning. Select and fresh air mode. Adjust the temperature to your preference.

This setting is suitable for all driving conditions whenever the outside temperature is above 32F (0C).

Press the A/C button to view the climate control display. Turn on the A/C by pushing ENTER on the interface selector. You will see A/C ON in the display. Make sure the temperature is set to maximum cool. Select . If the outside air is humid, select recirculation mode. If the outside air is dry, select fresh air mode. Set the fan to the desired speed by turning the interface knob.

1. 2. 3. 4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4. 5.

6.

Climate Control System

To Defog and DefrostDehumidify the Interior

210 2009 RL

The system automatically selects the proper mix of conditioned and/or heated air that will, as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to its lower or its upper limit, the system runs at full cooling or heating only. It does not regulate the interior temperature.

When you change the fan speed, the fan is taken out of AUTO mode and starts to run at the selected speed.

The automatic climate control system adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels to maintain the interior temperature you select.

In AUTO mode, the vehicles interior temperature is independently regulated for the driver and passenger. If the drivers side of the vehicle is getting too much sun, the system will adjust to a lower temperature.

Press the AUTO button. Set the desired temperature with the temperature control bars. You will see AUTO in the display if the climate mode is selected.

Select . The system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. Select . Set the fan and temperature controls to maximum level.

To clear the windshield faster, you can close the dashboard corner vents by rotating the wheel next to it. This sends more warm air to the windshield defroster vents. Once the windshield is clear, select the fresh air mode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

1. 2.

1.

2. 3.

Climate Control System

Automatic Climate ControlTo Remove Exterior Frost or Ice From the Windows

F eatures

211 2009 RL

The climate control system has two sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of the dashboard, and a temperature and humidity sensor next to the steering column. Do not cover the sensors or spill any liquid on them.

You can manually select various functions of the climate control system when it is in fully automatic mode. All other features remain automatically controlled. Making any manual selection causes the word AUTO in the display to go out.

Press the OFF button. However, a lack of airflow can cause the windows to fog up. You should keep the fan on at all times so stale air and moisture do not build up in the interior and cause fogging.

Climate Control Sensors

Sunlight and Temperature Sensors

To Turn Everything Off

Semi-automatic Operation

212

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

2009 RL

Most audio system functions can still be controlled by standard buttons, dials, and knobs, but some functions can only be accessed using the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a knob and a selector.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

When you unlock the doors with your remote and turn the audio system on, the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the radio preset memory (see page ), the auto select preset memory (see page ), and the volume and sound level settings (see page ) are turned to the respective memorized mode automatically.

The audio system can also be operated by voice control.

See the Navi section in your Quick Start Guide for an overview of this system, and the Navigation System manual for complete details.

Refer to Voice Control Basics for complete details (see page ).

216

226 217

304

On models without navigation system

On models with navigation system

Interface Dial Personalization Setting

Voice Control System

Audio System F

eatures

213

KNOB

ENTER

SELECTOR

2009 RL

Audio System

Playing the AM/FM Radio

214

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON

FM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

UPPER DISPLAY

SCAN BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BARSEEK BAR

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

SEEK BAR TUNE BAR

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

Hawaiian models

A.SEL BUTTON

U.S. models (Technology package model is shown) and Canadian models

2009 RL

You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: the preset buttons, and .

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position. Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display. Turn the system on by pressing the power/volume knob or the AM/FM button (AM or FM button on Canadian and Hawaiian models). Adjust the volume by turning the power/volume knob.

The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to are shown on the display. To change bands, press the AM/FM button (AM or FM button Hawaiian models). You can also change bands between FM1 and FM2 by pushing the interface selector up. Each time you push it up, the band will change to FM1 or FM2. On the FM bands, STEREO will be shown on the navigation screen and ST on the upper display, if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on AM is not available.

Use the TUNE bar to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Press the right side of the bar to tune to a higher frequency, or the left side to tune to a lower frequency. To tune with the interface dial, push the selector down, and turn the knob to TUNE icon. Then press ENTER on the selector, and turn the knob to the desired frequency. To exit the TUNE mode, press ENTER on the selector, then push the selector up.

CONTINUED

To Select a Station

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO SELECT

TUNE

Audio System F

eatures

215

TUNE ICON

BANDSTEREO ICON

2009 RL

Each preset button or preset icon can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM.

Use the tune, seek, or scan function to tune the radio to a desired station.

Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store two sets of FM frequencies with the preset buttons (on-screen icons).

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.

Press the preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep. You can also store frequencies with the interface dial. Select the preset icon you want to store the frequency on, then press ENTER on the interface selector, and hold it for more than 2 seconds.

The skip (seek) function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar, then release it. You can also activate the skip function (SEEK is displayed on the screen) by pushing the interface selector to the right or left.

The SCAN function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN button, then release it.

To scan with the interface dial, push the selector down, and then push it to the right. You will see SCAN flashing on the screen and the upper display.

The system will scan for a station with a strong signal. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the scan button again, or push the interface selector to the right again.

4.

1.

2.

3.

To store a preset memory location:

PresetSKIP (SEEK) SCAN

Audio System

216

SCAN ICON

2009 RL

If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area.

You will see 0 displayed if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset button. If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons (icons) as previously described.

To turn off auto select, press ENTER on the interface selector (press the A.SEL button) again. This restores the presets you originally set.

Push the interface selector down to scroll down the screen, highlight A.SEL, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will see A.SEL on the upper display and A.SEL on the screen, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds.

Press the A.SEL button. You will see A.SEL on the upper display A.SEL on the screen, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds. The system stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons.

U.S. models (except Hawaiian) and Canadian models

Hawaiian models

AUTO SELECT

Audio System F

eatures

217

A.SEL ICON

2009 RL

To switch the function between on and off, press and hold the DISP button. With the system on, you will see the RDS INFO ON message on the upper display. If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the displayed frequency switches to the station name.

On the FM band, you can select a favorite station and display the program service name according to the information provided by the radio data system (RDS) if the station has the RDS information available.

The program service name display function shows the name of the station you are listening to. With the audio system on and the FM band selected, you can turn this function on or off.

Audio System

Radio Data System (RDS) Program Service (PS) Name Display

218

RDS INFO ON MESSAGE

2009 RL

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft rock music COUNTRY: Country music SOFT: Adult hits and soft music TOP 40: Top 40 hits OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft rhythm and blues RELIGION: Religious music and religious talk CLASSIC: Classical music JAZZ: Jazz INFO: News, information, sports, talk, foreign language, personality, public, college, and weather TRAFFIC: Traffic information

With the FM band selected, you can select the program type provided by the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to display the radio information on the screen. Push down the selector on the interface dial, then turn the knob to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press ENTER to set your selection. The principal RDS categories are shown as follows:

ALL: All RDS category stations

When you turn off this function by pressing the DISP button, the upper display shows RDS INFO OFF.

If the station you are listening to is not an RDS station, the audio screen and the upper display continue to show the frequency with the PS name display function on.

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS) Category

Audio System F

eatures

219

RDS SEARCH ICON

2009 RL

If the system does not find a station, NOTHING will be blinking for about 5 seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.

Turn the selector to select an RDS category. You can use the search or scan function to find radio stations on the selected RDS category by pressing the selector to the right repeatedly. Press ENTER to set your selection. If you do nothing while the RDS category is selected, the selected category is canceled.

You can also select an RDS category with the TUNE bar. Press either side ( or ) of the TUNE bar to display an RDS category in the display. Select a category by pressing either side of the bar.

This function searches up and down a frequency for the strongest signal from the frequencies that carry the selected RDS category information. This can help you to find a station in your favorite category. To activate it, press and release either side ( or ) of the SEEK/SKIP bar. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking in the display while searching it. When the system finds a station, the selected RDS category name will be displayed again for about 5 seconds in the upper display.

RDS Program Search

Audio System

220

RDS CATEGORY

RDS CATEGORY

2009 RL

To activate RDS program search with the interface dial, push the AUDIO button to display the FM radio information on the screen. Push the selector down, and turn the knob to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press ENTER on the selector. The screen shows you the RDS category list.

Turn the knob to the desired RDS category.

While the RDS category is selected, move the selector knob to the right to select SEEK in the upper right corner of the screen. Then press ENTER to activate the seek function.

The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected RDS category. To activate it, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal in the selected RDS category. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking in the display while searching it. When the system finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.

CONTINUED

RDS Program SCAN

Audio System F

eatures

221

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SEEK is selected.

SEEK/SCAN ICON

2009 RL

Turn the knob to the desired RDS category.

To activate RDS program scan with the interface dial, push the AUDIO button to display the FM radio information on the screen. Push the selector down, and turn the knob to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press ENTER on the selector. The screen shows you the RDS category list.

While the RDS category is selected, move the selector knob to the right to select SCAN in the upper right corner of the screen. Then press ENTER to activate the scan function.

If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again.

If the system does not find a station, NOTHING will be blinking for about 5 seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station. You can use the RDS program

search or scan function even if the PS name display function is off. In this case, the display shows a frequency in place of a PS name.

Audio System

222

SEEK/SCAN ICON

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SCAN is selected.

2009 RL

This function displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

To activate radio text display, use the interface dial. Push the selector down, and turn the knob to select RADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER on the selector to enter the setting.

The display shows up to 64 characters on the selected RDS station.

If the selected RDS station has the radio text information, you will see the text indicator on the screen.

Radio Text Display

Audio System F

eatures

223

RADIO TEXT ICON

TEXT INDICATOR

2009 RL

Those bands cover these frequen- cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

Driving very near the transmitter of a station that is broadcasting on a frequency close to the frequency of the station you are listening to can also affect your radios reception. You may temporarily hear both stations, or hear only the station you are close to.

The radio can receive the complete AM and FM bands.

How well the radio receives stations is dependent on many factors, such as the distance from the stations transmitter, nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions.

A radio stations signal gets weaker as you get farther away from its transmitter. If you are listening to an AM station, you will notice the sound volume becoming weaker, and the station drifting in and out. If you are listening to an FM station, you will see the stereo indicator flickering off and on as the signal weakens. Eventually, the stereo indicator will go off and the sound will fade completely as you get out of range of the stations signal.

Radio stations on the AM band are assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the FM band are assigned frequencies at least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exact frequencies. It is fairly common for stations to round-off the frequency in their advertising, so your radio could display a frequency of 100.9 even though the announcer may identify the station as FM101.

Audio System

AM/FM Radio Frequencies AM/FM Radio Reception

224 2009 RL

Radio signals, especially on the FM band, are deflected by large objects such as buildings and hills. Your radio then receives both the direct signal from the stations transmitter, and the deflected signal. This causes the sound to distort or flutter. This is a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving.

Radio reception can be affected by atmospheric conditions such as thunderstorms, high humidity, and even sunspots. You may be able to receive a distant radio station one day and not receive it the next day because of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources can cause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

Audio System F

eatures

225 2009 RL

Select the mode you want to adjust by pushing the interface selector up or down, or by turning the interface knob.

To adjust them, press the AUDIO button, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface knob to SOUND. Then press ENTER on the selector.

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and FADER are each adjustable. You can also adjust the strength of the sound coming from the center and subwoofer speakers. In addition, you can set the AudioPilot and Centerpoint features (when playing a CD-DA) to on or off.

Audio System

Adjusting the Sound

226

SOUND ICON

2009 RL

To adjust bass and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the display. Turn the interface knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

These modes adjust the strength of the sound coming from each speaker. Fader adjusts the front-to-back strength, while balance adjusts the side-to-side strength. To adjust fader and balance, select FADER or BALANCE, then press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the screen. Turn the interface knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector. To equalize the fader or balance, turn the interface knob until the marks on the sound grid come to the center of the adjustment bar.

To adjust the strength of the sound from the center or subwoofer speaker, select it and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

CONTINUED

BASS/TREBLE FADER/BALANCE CENTER/SUBWOOFER

Audio System F

eatures

227 2009 RL

To set this feature on or off, select AudioPilot, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface knob to ON or OFF, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The ON or OFF indicator is shown on the screen.

Bose AudioPilot digital processing monitors sound within the cabin, and helps compensate for unwanted ambient noise with no perceived change in audio volume.

Bose Centerpoint signal processing processes stereo and matrix surround recordings to five independent channels, delivering a multi-channel surround sound experience, even from conventional stereo discs.

To set this feature on or off, select Centerpoint, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface knob to ON or OFF, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The ON or OFF indicator is shown on the display.

Centerpoint is only available when listening to a CD (CD-DA).

AudioPilot and Centerpoint are registered trade marks of the Bose corporation.

AudioPilot Centerpoint

Audio System

228

NOTE:

2009 RL

CONTINUED

Audio System

Playing the XM Radio

F eatures

229

SCAN BUTTON

SATELLITE RADIO BUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

INTERFACE DIAL

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

CATEGORY BUTTONS

U.S. models

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

PRESET BUTTON

DISPLAY/ MODE BUTTON

TUNE BUTTONS

(Technology package model is shown) and Canadian models

2009 RL

XM radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high- quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, XM radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the audio display.

Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM Radio anywhere in the United States, and Canada, except Hawaii and Alaska. XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio , Inc.

Push the AUDIO button to display XM information on the screen. You can operate the XM Satellite Radio system with the interface dial.

To listen to XM satellite radio, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Push the power/volume knob to turn on the audio system, and press the

button. The last channel you listened to will show in the display. Adjust the volume by turning the power/volume knob.

Audio System

Operating the XM Radio

230 2009 RL

CONTINUED

To switch between the category mode and channel mode, press and hold the DISP/MODE button until the mode changes. The CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is displayed on the screen. To switch the mode with the interface dial, scroll down, select MODE, and press ENTER on the selector.

In the category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can navigate through all of the channels within that category. In the channel mode, you can select all of the available channels.

Each time you press and release the DISP/MODE button, the audio display changes in the following sequence: channel name, channel number, category, artist name, and music title.

On the screen, you will see the selected CHANNEL (number), CATEGORY, NAME (artist name), and TITLE (music title).

The scan function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the channels within that category are scanned. To activate SCAN, press the SCAN button. To scan with the interface dial, scroll down, and push interface selector to the right. You will see SCAN on the screen.

The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, press the SCAN button or push the interface selector to the right again.

Press either side of the bar to select another category. You can also change a category by pushing the interface selector left or right.

Press either side of the TUNE bar to change channel selections. Press the side of the bar for higher numbered channels and the side for lower numbered channels. You can also change channels with the interface selector, push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface knob to choose TUNE and press ENTER on the selector. Turn the interface knob to the appropriate direction. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category.

Audio System

MODE SCAN

CATEGORY ( or )

TUNE

F eatures

231 2009 RL

You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band.

Once a channel is stored, press and release the proper preset button to tune to it.

Press the button or scroll up again. The other XM band will be shown. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels.

Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the button until you hear a beep.

In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected.

Use the TUNE or SCAN function to tune to a desired channel.

To store a channel: Press the button or scroll up by pushing the interface selector up. Either XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the display.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Preset

Audio System

232

XM BAND

2009 RL

Push down the selector knob to display the audio menu. Turn the selector knob to select NOTE, then press ENTER.

To replay and see the stored file, press the AUDIO button to select the audio display on the navigation screen.

Turn the selector knob to select a sound file, then press ENTER. The display shows the category, name and title information of the selected file.

To delete a file, select it by turning the selector knob, then push it to the right. Select Delete All or Delete Selected Item, then press ENTER.

Once you store the recorded sound file, you can replay it and confirm the information. The system can store up to 30 sound files. If you continue to store more files, the oldest one will be deleted each time you add new file.

The function records for about 10 seconds, enough for you to identify the selection when you play it back.

To activate this function, press and hold the button for about 2 seconds while a song or passage which you want to store is playing.

This function stores the sound content played on the selected satellite radio station with the channel, category, name and title information.

CONTINUED

If equipped

Audio System

Note Function

F eatures

233 2009 RL

The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

Because XM is unavailable in Alaska, the XM hardware equipped with your vehicle cannot be operated.

Audio System

Operation in Alaska

234

Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south.

Signal weaker in these areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

2009 RL

Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions:

Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road. Driving in tunnels. Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you. Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road. Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

There may be other geographic situations that could affect satellite radio reception.

If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Satellite Radio. With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position, push the power/volume knob to turn on the audio system, and press the

button. A variety of music types and styles will play.

Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road.

If you decide to purchase XM radio service, contact XM Radio at

, or at 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact

, or call 1-877-438- 9677. You will need to give them

your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press and release the side of the TUNE bar until 0 appears in the display. Your I.D. will appear in the display.

While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, category or CH will appear in the display, and youll be able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM Satellite Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Satellite Radio.

After youve registered with XM Radio, keep your audio system in the XM Radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes.

As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Receiving XM Satellite Radio Service

Audio System F

eatures

235 2009 RL

Operating the Disc Changer

Audio System

236

UPPER DISPLAY

INTERFACE DIAL

LOAD BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

SKIP BAR

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

TUNE BAR

EJECT BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

Hawaiian modelsU.S. models (Technology package model is shown) and Canadian models

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

EJECT BUTTON

TUNE BARSKIP BAR

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

DISC/AUX BUTTON

DISC/AUX BUTTON

2009 RL

Your vehicles audio system has an in-dash disc changer with the same controls used for the radio. To operate the disc changer, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc changer can play these disc formats:

CD (CD-DA) CD-R/RW DVD-A DTS

The disc packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

DVD-A discs not meeting DVD verification standards may not be playable.

The changer cannot play DVD-V or DVD-R/RW formats.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed discs are not playable.

DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

The changer can also play MP3 or WMA format (see page ).243

Audio System F

eatures

237

TM

2009 RL

Do not try to insert a disc until LOAD appears. You could damage the audio unit.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all six positions are loaded. If you are not loading all six positions, press the LOAD button again after the last disc has loaded.

If you stop loading discs before all six positions are filled, the system will wait for 15 seconds, stop the load operation, and begin playing the last disc loaded.

To load a single disc: Press and release the LOAD button on the changer unit. You will see BUSY on the upper display, and the disc load indicator turns red and starts blinking.

To load multiple discs in one operation:

Press and hold the LOAD button on the changer unit until you hear a beep. You will see BUSY on the upper display, and the disc load indicator turns red and starts blinking.

Insert the disc into the disc slot when the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears in the upper display at the same time. Insert it only halfway; the drive will pull it in the rest of the way. You will see BUSY on the upper display, and the disc load indicator turns red again and blinks as the disc is loaded.

When the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears on the upper display again, insert the next disc in the slot.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.

1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

Audio System

Loading Discs in the Changer

238

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

2009 RL

You can also select the empty position by pressing the appropriate preset button.

You can load a disc(s) in any mode (AM, FM, XM, or AUX) if you do not select an empty position.

You cannot select the empty position if there is no disc in the changer.

You can load a disc into an empty position while a disc is playing. Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display. Select the empty position (No Disc is shown on the audio control display) by rotating the interface dial. Then press ENTER on the selector to enter your selection. The current disc stops playing and starts the loading sequence. The disc just loaded will play.

Insert a disc into the disc slot when the disc load indicator turns green, and LOAD appears on the upper display at the same time. Insert the disc only about halfway; the drive will pull it in the rest of the way. You will see the disc number blinking on the upper display, and the disc load indicator turns red again and blinks as the disc is loaded.

Do not try to insert a disc until LOAD appears. You could damage the audio unit.

2.

Audio System F

eatures

239

EMPTY POSITION

2009 RL

You can also choose a track directly from a track list. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the track list screen will be shown. If there are no track names, track numbers are displayed. You will see the current track is highlighted. Turn the interface knob to select the desired track, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

When playing a CD (CD-DA) with CD-TEXT, the audio control display shows the disc number, album name, track number, and elapsed time. When playing a CD without this information, the number of the disc and track playing and the elapsed time are shown on the audio control display.

Each time you press and release the side of the skip bar or push the

interface selector to the right, the player skips forward to the beginning of the next track. Press and release the side of the skip bar or push the interface selector to the left to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press the side or push the interface selector to the left again to skip to the previous track. To move rapidly within a track, press and hold either side of the skip bar.

Select the changer by pressing the DISC/AUX button. The system will begin playing the last selected disc in the disc changer. You will see the current disc position highlighted.

To select a different disc, press the corresponding number on the preset buttons, or turn the interface knob to highlight the desired disc, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

To Play a Disc To Choose a Track

To Change Tracks

Audio System

240

CURRENT TRACK

2009 RL

To exit the track list display, press the AUDIO button, or push the interface selector to the left.

When you press and hold the SCAN button until you hear a beep or scroll down and push the interface selector to the right, the first track of the current disc plays for about 10 seconds. You will see SCAN next to DISC on the screen and SCAN on the upper display. To hear the rest of the disc, press the SCAN button or push the interface selector to the right again within 10 seconds.

If you dont, the system advances to the next disc, plays about 10 seconds of it, and continues through the rest of the discs the same way. When the system reaches the last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled, and the disc plays normally.

When you press the SCAN button or scroll down and push the interface selector to the left, the next track of the current track plays for about 10 seconds. You will see SCAN next to TRACK on the screen and SCAN on the upper display. To hear the rest of the track, press the SCAN button or push the interface selector to the left again within 10 seconds.

If you dont, the system advances to the next track, plays about 10 seconds of it, and continues through the rest of the tracks the same way.

Audio System

Disc ScanTrack Scan

F eatures

241 2009 RL

To replay the current track continuously, use the interface selector to scroll down, select TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see REPEAT next to TRACK on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight TRACK REPEAT (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

To replay the current disc continuously, use the interface selector to scroll down, select DISC REPEAT, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see REPEAT next to DISC on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight DISC REPEAT (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

To play the tracks of the current disc in random order, use the interface selector to scroll down, select TRACK RANDOM, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see RANDOM next to TRACK on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight TRACK RANDOM (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play

Audio System

242 2009 RL

To pause a disc, press the corresponding number of the current disc on the preset buttons. To play the disc again, press the preset button again.

If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the power/volume knob or by turning off the ignition switch, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off.

To take the system out of disc mode, press the AM/FM button, the DISC/AUX button, or the XM button (If equipped). The system will switch to the function associated with the button you pressed. If you pressed the DISC/AUX button, any auxiliary input device attached to the system will be selected. To return to disc mode, press the DISC/AUX button again and play will continue at the same point it left off.

You can play a DVD-A disc in the disc changer. The disc controls are same as previously described.

The changer plays MP3/WMA discs in recorded order. Maximum playable file layers are 8, and total playable tracks are 255. If your disc has a complex structure, the changer takes some time to read the disc before beginning play.

The specifications for compatible MP3 files are:

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) Bitrate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ 160/192/224/256/320 kbps (MPEG1) 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) Compatible with variable bitrate and multi-session

: AM or FM button on Hawaiian models.

CONTINUED

To Pause a Disc

To Stop Playing a Disc

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

Playing a DVD-A Disc

Audio System F

eatures

243 2009 RL

If the title is too long, it will not show all at once. Press and hold the DISP/ MODE button, and the rest of the title will show on the upper display.

You will also see the album and track name (CD-TEXT), or the folder and file name (MP3/WMA) under these conditions:

When you insert a disc, and the system begins to play.

Each time a new track, file, or folder plays.

The specifications for compatible WMA files are:

Compatible with variable bitrate and multi-session

To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the disc controls previously described, along with the following information.

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz Bitrate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

Each time you press the DISP/ MODE button while playing a CD (CD-DA), the upper display changes from album name, to track name, to artist name, and then to normal display. If the disc was not recorded with CD-TEXT, NO INFO will be shown on the upper display.

When playing a CD compressed in MP3/WMA format, the display changes from folder name, to file name, to track tag, to artist tag, to album tag, and then to normal display each time you press the DISP/MODE button. If the disc was not recorded with this information, NO INFO will be shown on the upper display.

All models except Hawaiian

Audio System

Name Display Function

244 2009 RL

To enter the FOLDER LIST, press ENTER on the selector, select a folder by turning the interface knob, then press ENTER on the selector. If you want to move to the parent folder, push the selector up. If there are no folder names, No Title is displayed. You will see the current folder highlighted.

This feature, when activated, replays all files in the selected folder. To activate folder repeat mode, select FOLDER REPEAT by interface knob, and press ENTER on the interface selector. You will see REPEAT next to FOLDER on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

This feature, when activated, plays all files in the current folder in random order. To activate folder random play, select FOLDER RANDOM by interface knob, and press ENTER on the interface selector. You will see RANDOM next to FOLDER on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight FOLDER RANDOM (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

Folder Repeat (MP3/WMA Mode)

Folder Random (MP3/WMA Mode)

Audio System F

eatures

245

CURRENT FOLDER

FOLDER REPEAT ICON FOLDER RANDOM ICON

2009 RL

To remove a different disc from the changer, first select it by pressing the corresponding number on the preset button or turning the interface knob, and pressing ENTER on the interface selector. When that disc begins playing, press the eject button.

To eject all discs, press and hold the eject button.

To eject one disc, press and release the eject button.

You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off:

When you press the eject button while listening to the radio, or with the audio system turned off, the disc that was last selected is ejected. After that disc is ejected, pressing the eject button again will eject the next disc in numerical order. By doing this six times, you can remove all the discs from the changer.

To remove the disc that is currently playing, press and release the eject ( ) button. You will see EJECT on the upper display. When you remove the disc from the slot, the system begins the load sequence so you can load another disc in that position. If you do not load another disc within 15 seconds, the system selects the previous mode [AM, FM1, FM2, or XM Radio (all models except Hawaiian models)].

If you do not remove the disc from the slot, the system will reload the disc after 10 seconds and put the disc changer in pause mode. To begin playing the disc, press the DISC/AUX button.

Removing Discs from the Changer

Audio System

246 2009 RL

Audio System

Playing an iPod

F eatures

247

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

SKIP BAR DISP BUTTON

DISC/AUX BUTTON

U.S. Technology package model and Canadian models are shown

INTERFACE DIAL

2009 RL

This audio system can operate the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the in-dash disc changer. To play an iPod, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector, then press the DISC/AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. The iPod will also be recharged with the ignition switch in these positions.

The audio system reads and plays playable sound files on the iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device. The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

You can select the AUX mode by using the navigation system voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.

iPods that are compatible with your audio system are listed below.

Use the latest firmware.

Use only compatible iPods with the latest firmware. iPods that are not compatible will not work in this audio unit.

:

Model iPod 5G iPod classic iPod nano iPod nano 2nd generation iPod nano 3rd generation iPod touch iPhone

Firmware Ver. 1.2 or more Ver. 1.0 or more Ver. 1.2 or more Ver. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more Ver. 1.1.1 or more

Audio System

To Play an iPod

Voice Control System

248 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Do not connect your iPod using a hub.

Do not keep the iPod in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector.

We recommend backing up your data before playing it. Unclip the USB connector by

pivoting it, and pull out the USB adapter cable in the console compartment. Install the dock connector to the

USB adapter cable securely.

Connect your dock connector to the iPod correctly and securely.

In AAC format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE, and then skips to the next file.

1.

3.

2.

Audio System

Connecting an iPod

F eatures

249

NOTE:

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB ADAPTER CABLE

DOCK CONNECTORUSB CONNECTOR

2009 RL

The current file number and total of the selected playable files are displayed in the upper display. Pressing the AUDIO button displays the artist, album and track (file) names on the navigation screen.

When the iPod is connected and the iPod mode is selected on the audio display, the USB and iPod indicators are shown in the display. After loading, you will see the Acura logo on the iPod. That means you can only operate your iPod using the vehicles audio unit.

It may take a few minutes for the Acura logo to display on the iPod. If the display does not change, this function is not supported on your iPod model or firmware.

If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod, the iPod may need to be reset. Follow the instructions that came with your iPod, or you can find reset instructions online at

If the iPod indicator does not appear in the audio display, check the connections, and try to reconnect the iPod a few times.

:

www.apple.com/ ipod.

Audio System

250

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

2009 RL

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar, to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file.

You can also change files with the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display on the navigation screen. Push the selector to the right side to skip forward and to the left side to skip backward.

To move rapidly forward or backward within a track, press and hold the / or /

button.

You can also select a file from any of the iPod menus: playlists, artists, albums and songs, by using the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control display on the navigation screen. Push up the interface selector to display the iPod menu. Turn the knob on the interface dial to select a desired list.

CONTINUED

Audio System

SKIP

To Select a File from iPod MenuTo Change or Select Files

F eatures

251 2009 RL

You can select any type of repeat and random mode on the audio menu. Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control screen, then push down the selector to display the audio menu. Turn the knob on the interface dial to select an audio mode: repeat, album random, and track random. Press ENTER to set your selection.

Push ENTER on the selector to display the items on that list, then turn the knob on the interface dial to select a desired list. Pushing the selector up or down moves a selection to the top or bottom of the screen items. Press ENTER to set your selection.

If you select ALL, all available files on the selected list are played.

Press the AUDIO button to go back to the normal audio playing display. Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen, and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio control display on the screen.

Audio System

To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

252

Push down the selector.

2009 RL

CONTINUED

To cancel the selected mode, press ENTER again while the highlighted mode is selected on the audio control display.

This feature plays all available files from the selected items in the iPod menu list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. You will see TRACK RANDOM on the screen. To turn it off, have this mode highlighted and press ENTER again.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar changes the file while keeping the repeat feature.

This feature continuously plays a file. To turn it off, press ENTER again.

Audio System

TRACK RANDOM

REPEAT

F eatures

253 2009 RL

To turn it off, have this mode highlighted and press ENTER again.

You can also select another list from the iPod menu while keeping the random function.

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.

This feature plays all available albums from the selected items in the iPod menu list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. The files in each album are played in the recorded order. You will see ALBUM RANDOM on the screen.

To play the radio, press the AM/FM or XM button. Press the DISC/AUX button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the DISC/ AUX button to switch the audio mode between the Bluetooth audio and iPod.

To play the radio, press the AM or FM button. Press the DISC/AUX button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the DISC/ AUX button to switch the audio mode between the Bluetooth audio and iPod.

Hawaiian models

All models except Hawaiian

Audio System

To Stop Playing Your iPod

ALBUM RANDOM

254

NOTE:

2009 RL

You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see OK to disconnect message in the iPod display. Always make sure you see OK to disconnect message in the iPod display before you disconnect it. Make sure to follow the iPods instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable.

The displayed message may vary on models or versions. On some models, there is no message to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod while it is playing, the upper display and the audio screen (if selected) show NO DATA.

If you see an error message in the upper display, see page .

If you reconnect the same iPod, the system may begin playing where it left off, depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected.

:

272

Audio System

Disconnecting an iPod iPod Error Messages

F eatures

255 2009 RL

Audio System

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device

256

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

SKIP BAR

U.S. Technology package model and Canadian models are shown

DISC/AUX BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

DISPLAY BUTTON

2009 RL

CONTINUED

This audio system can operate the audio files from a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the in-dash disc changer. To play a USB flash memory device, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment, then press the DISC/AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3, WMA or AAC formats. Depending on the format, the display shows MP3, WMA or AAC when a USB flash memory device is playing. The USB flash memory device limit is up to 700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit.

Do not keep a USB flash memory device in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device.

Depending on the type and number of files, it may take some time before they begin to play.

Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.

You can select the AUX mode by using the navigation system voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.

The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 Mbyte or higher. Some digital audio players may be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory devices (such as devices with security lock- out features, etc.) will not work in this audio unit.

Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as the device or your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flash memory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle.

:

Audio System

To Play a USB Flash Memory Device

Voice Control System

F eatures

257

NOTE:

2009 RL

The specifications for compatible MP3 files are:

The specifications for compatible WMA files are:

The specifications for compatible AAC files are:

Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or AAC format, a file with unsupported version cannot be played. If the system finds it, the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.

Supported standards: MPEG1 Audio Layer3 MPEG2 Audio Layer3 Partition: Top partition only Maximum layers: 8

Partition: Top partition only Maximum layers: 8

Bitrate: 48 320 kbps Supported standards: MPEG4/AAC LC MPEG2/AAC LC Partition: Top partition only Maximum layers: 8

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2) Bitrate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ 160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps (MPEG1)

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz Bitrate: 48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384) Supported standards: WMA version 7/8/9

Sampling frequency: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/ 44.1/48 kHz

Audio System

258 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Unclip the USB connector by pivoting it, and pull out the USB adapter cable in the console compartment.

Connect the USB flash memory device to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely.

When the USB flash memory device is connected and the USB mode is selected on the audio system, the USB indicator is shown in the upper display. It also shows the folder and file numbers. Pressing the AUDIO button displays the folder and file

names, and the elapsed time in the navigation screen.

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar, to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a track, press and hold the / or /

button.

1. 2.

Audio System

Connecting a USB Flash Memory Device

To Change or Select Files

SKIP F eatures

259

USB CONNECTOR USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB ADAPTER CABLE

2009 RL

You can also change files with the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display on the navigation screen. Push the selector knob to the right side to skip to the beginning of the next file, and to the left side to skip to the beginning of the current file. Pushing it to the left again skips to the beginning of the previous file.

You can also select a folder or file from the list by using the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display on the navigation screen.

Audio System

To Select a File from Folder and File Lists

260

SKIP DIRECTION

SKIP DIRECTION

2009 RL

Press ENTER to change the display to the file list, then turn the knob on the interface dial to select a file. Press ENTER to set your selection.

To go back to the normal playing display, press the AUDIO button. Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio mode display.

You can select any type of repeat, random and scan modes on the audio menu screen. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display on the navigation screen. Push down the selector on the interface dial to display the audio menu items.

Push up the selector on the interface dial to switch the display to the folder list, then turn the knob on the interface dial to select a folder.

CONTINUED

Audio System

To Select Repeat, Random or Scan Mode:

F eatures

261 2009 RL

To cancel the selected mode, push down the selector to display the audio menu on the audio control display. Turn the knob on the interface dial to select the highlighted play mode, then press ENTER to turn off that selected mode.

This feature replays all the files in the selected folder in the order they are stored.

This feature continuously plays a file. Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off this feature.

This feature plays the files in the selected folder in random order.

This feature plays all the files in random order.

Turn the knob on the interface dial to select a play mode: folder random, track random, folder repeat, track repeat. Press ENTER to set your selection.

Audio System

FOLDER REPEAT

TRACK REPEAT

FOLDER RANDOM

TRACK RANDOM

262 2009 RL

This function samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored. To activate the scan feature, push the selector to the right. You will see TRACK SCAN on the screen. You will also see SCAN on the upper display and the file number blinking. You will get a 10 second sampling of each file in the folder. Push the selector repeatedly to get out of the scan mode. The system plays the last file sampled.

You can also select the scan feature with the SCAN button on the control panel. Press and release the SCAN button. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the scan mode and play the last file sampled.

This function samples the first file in each folder in the order they are stored. To activate the folder scan feature, push the selector to the right repeatedly. You will see FOLDER SCAN on the screen. You will also see SCAN on the upper display and the folder number blinking. You will get a 10 second sampling of each first file in the folder(s). Push the selector repeatedly to get out of the scan mode. The system plays the last file sampled.

You can also select the folder scan feature with the SCAN button on the control panel. Press and release the SCAN button repeatedly. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled.

Audio System

TRACK SCAN FOLDER SCAN

F eatures

263 2009 RL

You can disconnect the USB flash memory device at any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system. Make sure to follow the USB flash memory devices instructions when you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flash memory device while it is playing, the upper display and the audio screen (if selected) show NO DATA.

If you see an error message in the upper display, see page .To play the radio, press the AM/FM

or XM button. Press the DISC/AUX button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the DISC/ AUX button to switch the audio mode between the USB mode and Bluetooth audio.

To play the radio, press the AM or FM button. Press the DISC/AUX button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the DISC/ AUX button to switch the audio mode between the USB mode and Bluetooth audio.

273 All models except Hawaiian

Hawaiian models

Audio System

To Stop Playing a USB Flash Memory Device

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages

Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory Device

264 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Audio System

Playing Bluetooth Audio

F eatures

265

AUDIO CONTROL DISPLAY

DISP BUTTON

DISC/AUX BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

AUDIO BUTTON

SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

UPPER DISPLAY

2009 RL

Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to the HFL.

Press the DISC/AUX button . When the phone is recognized, you will see the Bluetooth Audio message on the upper display and the audio control display on the navigation screen (if selected), and the system begins to play.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth audio system, which allows you to listen to streaming audio from your Bluetooth audio compatible phone. This function is only available on Bluetooth Audio Compatible phones that are paired and linked to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system (see page ).

Once a device is linked, the name of the device will appear on the screen. Pressing the DISP button switches the upper display between the Bluetooth Audio and the device name.

If an iPod, USB flash memory device or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected as the last mode, you will see iPod, USB or AUX in the upper display and the audio control display on the navigation screen (if selected). Push the DISC/AUX button again to play audio files from your Bluetooth Audio phone.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be delay before the system begins to play.

To begin to play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. Follow the phone makers operating instructions.

In some states it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. You can find an approved phone by visiting

, or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call 1-866-78-ACURA.

:

358

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

Audio System

To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

266

NOTE:

2009 RL

CONTINUED

In the following conditions, the display shows NO CONNECT message after pressing the preset 1 button.

You can also operate the skip function with the interface dial on the audio control display of the navigation screen. Push the AUDIO button. Each time you push the selector on the interface dial to the right, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Push it to the left to skip backward to the beginning to the current file. Push the selector to the left again to skip to the previous file.

The phone is not linked to HFL.

You can select the AUX mode by using the navigation system voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.

Press the side of the SKIP bar to skip forward to the next file, and press the side to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Push the side again to skip to the previous file.

The phone is not turned on. The phone is not in the vehicle. Your phone is not set to play audio files.

If your Bluetooth Audio compatible phone does not operate as described, make sure it is an Acura approved phone. To find out if your phone is approved, go to

(in Canada, visit ), or call the

HandsFreeLink client support at (888) 528-7876.

To skip a file

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink www. acura.ca.

Audio System

Voice Control System

F eatures

267 2009 RL

To pause or resume a file To change sound settings

The resume/pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily.

Press the AUDIO button, then push down the selector to display the audio menu. Turn the knob to switch the setting between the resume/ pause mode and the sound mode. Select SOUND, then press ENTER to set your selection.

Turn the knob on the interface dial to switch the setting between the resume/pause mode and the sound mode. Select RESUME/PAUSE, then press ENTER to set your selection. Each time you press ENTER, the system switches between the resume mode and pause mode.

The pause function may not work on some types of files.

Turn the knob to your liking (see page for more sound setting information).

226

Audio System

268

NOTE:

2009 RL

CONTINUED

If you receive a call when the Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the Talk button on the steering wheel. The screen and the upper display switch to the HFL mode (see page ).

After ending the call, press the HFL Back button to go back to the Bluetooth Audio mode.

If you receive a call while the system is in the pause mode, the mode will be canceled and Bluetooth Audio will continue to play.

Select any other audio mode by pressing a button; FM, AM or DISC (if a disc is loaded), on the audio control panel or press the mode button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select another audio mode. If an iPod or USB flash memory device is connected to the USB adapter cable or audio unit is connected to AUX jack, pressing the DISC/AUX button also changes a mode.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

Select any other audio mode by pressing a button; FM/AM, XM or DISC/AUX (if a disc is loaded), on the audio control panel or press the mode button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select another audio mode. If an iPod or USB flash memory device is connected to the USB adapter cable or audio unit is connected to AUX jack, pressing the AUX button also changes a mode.

355

Hawaiian models

All models except Hawaiian

Audio System

To switch to HFL mode To turn off the Bluetooth Audio mode

F eatures

269 2009 RL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Audio System

270 2009 RL

The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again.

Error Message

For additional information on damaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer.

Cause Solution

275

FOCUS Error

Eject Error

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s). Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt (see page 275). Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

Disc Changer Error Messages F

eatures

271

CHECK DISC

BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK

MANUAL PUSH EJECT

2009 RL

If you see an error message in the upper display while playing an iPod, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message

Cause Solution

USB ROM error

Abnormal power source

No files in iPod

Use of unsupported device Recognition failure of iPod

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error. Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some AAC files in the iPod. Appears when an unsupported device is connected. Disconnect the device. Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

iPod Error Messages

272

USB ERROR

BAD DEVICE PLEASE CHECK

MANUAL

NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

iPod RETRY

2009 RL

If you see an error message in the upper display while playing a USB flash memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message

Cause Solution

USB ROM error

Abnormal power source

Use of unsupported files

No files in USB flash memory device

Use of unsupported USB flash memory device

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error. Appears when the files in the USB flash memory device are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for a few seconds, then plays the next song. Appears when the USB flash memory device is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash memory device. Save some MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash memory device. Appears when an unsupported device is connected. See page 188 for the specification information for the USB flash memory device. If it appears when the supported device is connected, reconnect the device.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages F

eatures

273

USB ERROR

BAD DEVICE PLEASE CHECK

MANUAL

UNPLAYABLE

NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

2009 RL

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, use only high quality discs labeled for audio use.

When recording a CD-R or CD-RW, the recording must be closed for it to be used by the disc changer.

When a disc is not being played, store it in its case to protect it from dust and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep discs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.

A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects in the disc changer.

Handle a disc by its edges; never touch either surface. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the disc. These, along with contamination from finger prints, liquids, and felt- tip pens, can cause the disc to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside edge.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch (12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- shaped discs may jam in the drive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly to prevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

274 2009 RL

The in-dash disc player/changer has a sophisticated and delicate mechanism. If you insert a damaged disc as indicated in this section, it may become stuck inside and damage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shown to the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information on Recommended Discs

Protecting Your Discs F

eatures

275

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/ Cracked

With Label/ Sticker

With Plastic Ring

Using Printer Label Kit

Bubbled/ Wrinkled

2009 RL

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play due to the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on the discs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printed with the following logo.

Audio unit may not play the following formats.

4. 5.

Protecting Your Discs

276

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

2009 RL

The auxiliary input jack is inside the console compartment. The system will accept auxiliary input from standard audio accessories.

When you plug in a mini-jack cable between a compatible audio unit and the jack, you will see AUX in the display and the system automatically switches to AUX mode.

Auxiliary Input Jack F

eatures

277

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

2009 RL

Three controls for the audio system are mounted in the steering wheel hub. These let you control basic functions without removing your hand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volume up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top or bottom of the button, hold it until the desired volume is reached, then release it.

If you are playing a disc, the system skips to the beginning of the next track/file (in MP3/WMA mode) each time you press the top ( ) of the CH button. Press the bottom ( ) to return to the beginning of the current track/file. Press it again to return to the previous track/file.

To select a different disc (folder in MP3/WMA mode), press and hold the top ( ) or bottom ( ) of the CH button until you hear a beep.

The MODE button changes the mode. Pressing the button repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, or disc (if a disc(s) is loaded). On models with satellite radio system, you can also select XM1 and XM2. If an iPod or a USB flash memory device is plugged into the system, you can also select AUX.

If you are listening to the radio, use the CH button to change stations. Each time you press the top ( ) of the button, the system goes to the next preset station on the band you are listening to. Press the bottom ( ) to go back to the previous station.

To activate the seek function, press and hold the top ( ) or bottom ( ) of the CH button until you hear a beep. The system searches up or down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal.

Remote Audio Controls

278

MODE BUTTON

CH BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

2009 RL

If you are listening to XM Satellite Radio, use the CH button to change channels. Each time you press the top ( ) of the button, the system goes to the next preset channel. Press the bottom ( ) to go back to the previous preset channel.

To select a different channel of the category you are listening to, press and hold the top ( ) or bottom ( ) of the CH button until you hear a beep.

On all models except Hawaiian

Remote Audio Controls F

eatures

279 2009 RL

Your vehicles audio system may disable itself if it is disconnected from electrical power for any reason. To make it work again, you must enter a specific five-digit code with the preset buttons. Because there are hundreds of number combinations possible from the five digits, making the system work without knowing the exact code is nearly impossible.

If you lose the card, you must obtain the code number from your dealer. To do this, you will need the audio systems serial number.

If your vehicles battery is discon- nected or goes dead, or the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. If this happens, you will see in the upper display the next time you turn on the system. Use the preset buttons to enter the code. The code is located on the radio code card included in your owners manual kit. When it is entered correctly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering the code, do not start over; complete the five-digit sequence, then enter the correct code. You have 10 tries to enter the correct code.

If the code card is lost, your dealer can access your code with your radios serial number. To access the serial number, turn the radio on. It must display , then turn the radio off. Push and hold the preset 1 and preset 6 buttons, then

push the power/volume knob. The serial number will appear in two sets of four digits.

The system will retain your AM and FM presets even if power is disconnected.

You should have received a radio code card that lists your audio systems code and serial numbers. It is best to store this card in a safe place at home. In addition, you should write the audio systems serial number in this owners manual.

Radio Theft Protection

280 2009 RL

Press this button to display the screen (see page ).

The compass system in your vehicle contains several convenient features, including a direction and elevation finder, a calendar reminder for important events, a calculator, and a trip computer to help you track your mileage and fuel economy.

The controls for the compass system are on the center console panel. These controls are also used to operate the climate control system (see page ) and the audio system (see page ).

Press this button to display the screen (see page ) for the

trip computer, calendar, calculator, and voice command Help.

204 214

286

287

CONTINUED

Menu Button

Compass Button

Compass

System Controls

Main Menu

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system) F

eatures

281

CANCEL BUTTON

COMPASS BUTTON

(Display mode) BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

UPPER DISPLAY

SCREEN

MENU BUTTON

TRIP BUTTON

SET UP BUTTON

2009 RL

Press this button to cancel the current screen and return to the previous screen.

This button switches the display between day mode, night mode, and off (see page ).

Press the button to display the set up screen (see page ) to change and update information in the system.

Press this button to display the screen (see page ).

Most functions of the compass system can be accessed with the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts: a knob and a selector.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to

select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector in (ENTER) to go to that selection.

All selections and instructions are displayed on the screen.

In almost all cases, you can enter a selection into the system by pushing in on the interface selector.

Clean the screen with a soft damp cloth. You may use a mild cleanser intended for use on liquid crystal displays (LCDs). Harsher chemicals may damage the screen.

Shows the radio band, frequency, volume, the climate control status, and the time.

288

293

298

Interface Dial

Cancel Button

(Display Mode) Button

Set Up Button

Trip Button

Screen

Upper Display

Trip Computer

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

282

KNOB

ENTER

SELECTOR

2009 RL

Please read the disclaimer carefully before you continue. To go to the compass screen, select OK by pushing in the interface selector.

The first screen to appear is the compass system globe screen. The screen then changes to the disclaimer screen:

The button does not appear immediately. It appears after the system is loaded. The OK command cannot be activated by voice.

Throughout the compass system section, the icon is used to indicate features that are dependent on the Driver number as displayed on the multi-information display Welcome display.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the compass system to boots up within a few seconds.

CONTINUED

System Start-up

OK

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system) F

eatures

283

NOTE:

2009 RL

If you select , the reminder will not show up again. If you wish to have the reminder show up again later in the day, select

and push in on the interface selector.

If you press the CANCEL button, the message will be displayed the next time you start the vehicle.

The system will display the current message and any older or previously unread messages, with the newest message listed first.

If you do not push in on the , the screen will

go dark after 30 seconds. To return to the disclaimer screen, press any compass or voice control button.

If you do not select , and then enter the Set up or Trip computer screens, some items are not available, and will show up as darkened buttons (grayed out).

If any calendar reminders were previously entered, the calendar reminder screen is displayed next.

The calendar reminder screen remains displayed until you select

, or press the CANCEL button.

OK

Remind Later

interface selector

OK

OK Remind Later

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

284

NOTE:

NOTE:

2009 RL

The vehicle senses the driver number, based on which keyless remote is used to unlock the vehicle. If two drivers with remotes approach the vehicle at the same time, the welcome display and related settings are based on which remote the vehicle first senses.

If both remotes come within range simultaneously, the Welcome display may be unpredictable.

The compass system uses the driver number (as recognized by the multi- information display) to personalize the compass system. For example, if Driver 1 unlocks the vehicle, the Driver 1 personal address book and other navigation settings are automatically loaded when the vehicle is started. There is no way to change from one drivers settings to another while driving.

For information on linking and unlinking the keyless access remotes, see page .

When the keyless access remote is deliberately unlinked, (as when giving the key to a valet) the multi- information display will display Welcome. Then the following occurs:

The calendar feature is not selectable (buttons grayed out).

Setup values (like volume, brightness, etc.) can be changed but are not remembered the next time you restart the vehicle.

173

Keyless Memory Settings

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system) F

eatures

285

NOTE:

TM

2009 RL

You can see the current latitude, longitude, and elevation at any time when you press the COMPASS button or say Display map guide. The date and time is also displayed.

If the battery is disconnected or the fuse for the compass system is removed, the system may require GPS initialization (see page ).

If the system does not receive the elevation information, the display shows only current latitude and longitude.

If the GPS reception is low, the display shows a Low GPS reception message.

299

The Compass Screen

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

286

NOTE:

2009 RL

The voice command help screen displays several topics that help you to understand your vehicles voice control system. To go to the voice command help screen, say or select Voice command help. Then select a topic by saying either the topic name or its line number.

To use the voice command tutorial, say or select Getting started. The display changes to the Getting started screen.

When you say Display menu or press the MENU button, the display changes to the screen. To select a menu item, turn the interface knob to highlight the item, then press the interface selector.

If some items appear grayed out and cannot be selected, the vehicle does not sense the drivers ID of the remote (see page ).

Select the line number of the tutorial you want to view, and the tutorial will automatically be read out. To stop the system from reading the tutorial, move the interface knob to the right.

173 CONTINUED

Main Menu

Main menu

Voice Command Help

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system) F

eatures

287

NOTE:

2009 RL

When you make a selection (such as Navigation general command help), you will see the help commands that can be used with the voice control. To have the system read the list, say Read list, or select by moving the interface selector to the right, and the system will read the list to you.

The screens display the trip information from the multi- information display in the gauge assembly.

For a listing of all voice commands, see on page

.

To go to the trip computer, say Trip Computer, select Trip computer from the main menu, or press the TRIP button on the center console panel.

307 Voice Command Index

Trip Computer

trip computer

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

288 2009 RL

The calendar feature allows you to enter events and be reminded of them in the future. When you say Calendar or select the on the screen, the display changes to the

screen.

Dates with an icon indicate there is a schedule entry for that date.

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining in the tank. This distance is estimated from the average fuel economy over the last several miles, so it will vary with changes in speed, traffic, etc.

The average fuel, average speed, and elapsed time meters can be reset automatically (see page ).

The Range value is approximate, and may vary from actual range.

The Average Fuel and MPG may vary from actual fuel consumed. These values are estimates only.

Shows the instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon.

Shows you the current fuel economy in miles per gallon.

Shows you the average fuel economy in miles per gallon since the display was last reset.

Shows the elapsed time that the ignition has been on since the display was last reset.

Shows you the average speed in miles per hour since the display was last reset.

75

RangeMPG

Instant Fuel

Average Fuel

Elapsed Time

Average Speed

CONTINUED

Calendar

Resetting the Display

Calendar Main Menu

calendar

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system) F

eatures

289

NOTE:

2009 RL

You can scroll through the calendar day by day by turning the interface knob, or select the day by voice. When you push the interface selector up or down, you can also scroll through the calendar week by week. When you say Next month or Previous month, or when you push the interface selector to the right or left, the system displays the next or previous month.

Set your schedule by selecting the day on the calendar, and the display changes to the screen.

The default for the reminder is . This allows the system to remind you of the calendar item the next time you start the vehicle. See

on page .

Say or select , then enter the name of your title using the interface selector. Once you enter the title, say or select . The title will be displayed on the specified date of the Calendar screen.

Say or select , and the system will show the Enter Message screen. You can enter a message on two lines. Use to change the line. Once you have entered the message, say or select Done. The message will be displayed on the specified date of the calendar screen.

283

Reminder

System Start-up

Title

Message

Entering Your Schedule

Edit schedule

ON

Edit title

Done

Edit message

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

290 2009 RL

Message Icon

Delete

Done

Say or select , and the system displays a list of icons you can select to help identify the type of message you entered. The message icon you choose will be displayed alongside the specified date on the calendar screen.

From the screen, select the date of the schedule you wish to remove. To remove the schedule, say or select .

Once you have finished entering the schedule, say or select . The

screen is redisplayed and a category icon appears.

You can only enter one message per day. To re-activate a previous message, turn the reminder setting from

to . If it is not turned on, the reminder will not be displayed when you start the vehicle. For more information, refer to System Start-up on page .

This allows you to move your calendar entry to a different date. If you say or select , the

screen is displayed with existing entries grayed out. Select a new day and the screen is redisplayed with the new date.

283

CONTINUED

Message icon

calendar

Delete

Done calendar

OFF ON

Edit date calendar

edit schedule

Edit Date

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system) F

eatures

291

NOTE:

2009 RL

When you say or select Calculator, the display changes to the

screen.

Enter the digits and operation symbols with the interface selector.

Use the interface selector to control the calculator, and calculator conversion feature. To convert a unit of measurement, do this:

Enter a numeric value to be converted (for example, 100).

Push the interface selector down to select Unit conversion. The screen above appears.

Turn the interface knob until the conversion you want is highlighted (weight, for example), then push the selector in to select it. The screen for that conversion type appears (see illustration in step 4).

1.

2.

3.Calculator Convert

Calculator

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

292 2009 RL

Turn the interface knob until the unit you want to convert from is highlighted (kilogram, for example), then push the selector in to select it as it the example above.

The set-up functions consist of three different screens that allow you to change and update information in the system. To display the

, say Set up or press the SET UP button, and then select an item. To select more setup items, say More, or select MORE at the top right corner of the screen.

The first setup screen allows you to change the systems brightness, contrast, black level, volume, interface dial feedback, and clock adjustment. To select a setup item, turn the interface knob until it is highlighted, then push the interface selector in to select it.

4.

CONTINUED

System Set-up

set up screen

First Set up Screen

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system) F

eatures

293 2009 RL

Brightness Black Level Volume

If you are having trouble viewing the screen in bright lighting conditions, try increasing the brightness.

Contrast

There are 11 possible brightness settings. To change the brightness, say Brightness up or Brightness down. You can also select

and change the setting by turning the interface knob.

There are 11 possible black level settings. To change the black level, say Black level up or Black level down. You can also select

and change the setting by turning the Interface knob. Changes to the display are very subtle this is normal.

Say Volume up or Volume down.

There are 11 possible contrast settings. To adjust the contrast, say Contrast up or Contrast down. You can also select and change the setting by turning the interface knob. Changes to the display are very subtle this is normal.

You can have separate daytime and nighttime settings for brightness, contrast, and black level. Adjust each setting when the display is in either daytime or nighttime mode. Use the Display mode button (see page ) to select daytime or nighttime mode.

To adjust the volume of the system voice, do one of these actions:

Select volume off.

If you turn the volume off, you will not hear voice command confirmations.

Select , then change the setting by turning the interface knob.

282

Brightness Black

Level

Contrast

Volume

Tip:

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

294

NOTE:

NOTE:

2009 RL

Interface Dial Feedback

On

Auto (default)

No

The system always reads what you select.

The system reads your selection only while the vehicle is moving.

The system does not read your selection.

Clock Adjustment Changing this setting allows you to control when (and if) the system will read the current selection you choose with the interface dial. This feature can minimize the need to look at the screen while operating the dial. The three settings are explained in the following table. The factory default setting is .

You can adjust the clock of your system. When the battery is disconnected or the fuse for the compass system is removed, you need to reset the time. See page

for more information on setting the clock.

The second setup screen allows you to change the systems voice recognition feedback, auto volume for speed, and clock settings. To select a setup item, turn the interface knob until it is highlighted, then push the interface selector in to select it.

313

CONTINUED

AUTO

Setting Feedback Level

Second Set up Screen

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system) F

eatures

295 2009 RL

The third setup screen allows you to change the systems screen color and verbal reminders. To select a setup item, turn the interface knob until it is highlighted, then push the interface selector in to select it.

To view the third setup screen, move the interface selector down. To return to the first setup screen, say Backward, or move the interface selector to the left to select BACK.

To view the second setup screen, say More, or move the interface selector to the right to select MORE. To go back to the first setup screen, say Backward, or move the interface selector to the left to select BACK.

Allows you to turn voice control system prompts or . To select ON or OFF, turn the interface knob to the right or left, then press the interface selector. When , you will not hear the voice control system confirmations or prompts.

This compass system automatically increases the system voice volume according to the vehicle speed. This setting allows you to adjust the rate of the volume increase. When you select , the volume is not increased by the vehicle speed.

You can adjust the clock of your system. When the battery is disconnected or the fuse for the compass system is removed, you need to reset the time. See page

for more information on setting the clock. 313

Voice Recognition Feedback

Auto Volume for Speed

Clock Adjustment Third Set up Screen

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

ON OFF

OFF

OFF

296 2009 RL

Verbal ReminderColor This function allows you to turn or verbal reminders. Examples of these reminders include:

Driving with the parking brake on

Driving with the trunk or a door open

A reminder to fasten the drivers and front passengers seat belts

To select ON or OFF, turn the interface knob to the right or left, then press the interface selector.

To change the color, select Day or night by turning the interface knob to the right or left. Press the interface selector, then turn the interface knob to select desired color. Press the interface selector to enter your choice.

Choose silver metal (factory default) as the color to obtain the best display contrast. Choose black metal (factory default) as the color to obtain the best display contrast.To view the Select a color screen,

say Color, or select COLOR on the screen. You can choose from one of five colors for the day and night display modes.

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

ON OFF

Day

Night

F eatures

297

NOTE:

2009 RL

If the battery goes dead or is disconnected for any reason, you will have to enter a security code into both the audio system and the compass system before you can use it again.

If for any reason, you lose power to the compass system (the battery was disconnected), the system needs to be initialized before you can use it.

Initialization requires this:

Entry of the compass system 4- digit security code to unlock the system.

GPS initialization. This may not be needed depending on how long the system was without power.

Pressing the ( ) button allows you to switch

display modes.

Each time you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, the display mode is in auto. The screen changes between day and night modes when you turn the headlights on and off.

To override the auto mode, select either day or night mode. This can be useful if you want to use the headlights during the day. Be aware that using day mode at night will make the screen extremely bright.

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

Entering the Security CodeSystem InitializationSetting Display Mode Display

mode

298 2009 RL

Depending on the length of time the battery was disconnected, your system may require GPS initialization. If it does, the above screen appears. Follow the instructions on the screen.

When you purchased the vehicle, you should have received two cards that have the audio and compass systems security codes and serial numbers. Keep these cards in a safe place in case you need the codes. If you lose the cards, you must obtain the security codes from your dealer.

Enter the four-digit compass system security code. If you have entered it correctly, the display changes to the

. You have ten chances to enter the correct code. If all ten are incorrect, turn the ignition to OFF, then back to ON (II) to have ten more chances to enter the correct code.

To enter the code, turn the interface knob to select the number, then press the interface selector to enter it. Keep doing the same procedure to enter all four correct numbers. If you need to delete the number you entered mistakenly, move the

interface selector to the right.

Follow the instructions in the audio system section to enter the 5-digit audio code (see page ). The system voice will not operate if the audio code is not entered

280

CONTINUED

GPS initialization

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

Disclaimer screen

F eatures

299 2009 RL

After 30 minutes with this screen displayed, turn off the engine and restart the vehicle. If you now see the , the GPS initialization is complete.

The average acquiring time is less than 10 minutes, but it can take as long as 45 minutes. If the system is still unable to acquire a signal, follow the instructions on the screen, or contact your local dealer for assistance.If within ten minutes the system fails

to locate a sufficient number of satellites to locate your position, the screen above appears. Follow the instructions on the screen.

If this procedure is not necessary the system proceeds directly to the

(see page ). During initialization, the system searches for all available GPS satellites, and obtains their orbital information. During this procedure the vehicle should be out in the open with a clear view of the sky.

286

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

Disclaimer screen Compass screen

300

NOTE:

2009 RL

This EULA grants you the following license;

You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.

NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC., HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS RELIED UPON ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC., TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC., FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).

You have acquired a device (DEVICE) that includes software licensed by ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC., from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (collectively MS). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and online or electronic documentation (SOFTWARE) are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.

CONTINUED

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE.

License notice

F eatures

301 2009 RL

Limitations, on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not with standing this limitation.

Additional Software/Services. The SOFTWARE may permit ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC.,, MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet- based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE (Supplemental Components).

No Liability for Certain Damages, EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S.TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).

NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU. ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDING ON, MS.

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

302 2009 RL

You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.

ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC.,, MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates reserve the right to discontinue any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE.

If SOFTWARE is provided by ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC., on separate media and labeled Recovery Media you may use the Recovery Media solely to restore or reinstall the SOFTWARE originally installed on the DEVICE.

If ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC., provides or makes available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.

If MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).

CONTINUED

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS.

RECOVERY MEDIA.

F eatures

303 2009 RL

While using the voice control system, all of the speakers are muted.

For models with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation of the audio system, the climate control system and some functions of the compass system. The voice control system uses the TALK and BACK buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone

near the map light on the ceiling.

You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and country destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information on exporting the SOFTWARE, see http: //www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

Voice Control BasicsEXPORT RESTRITIONS.

304

NOTE:

NOTE:

TALK BUTTON

BACK BUTTON MICROPHONE (on the ceiling)

2009 RL

If the system does not understand a command or you wait too long to give a command, it responds with Pardon, Please repeat, or Would you say again. If the system cannot perform a command or the command is not appropriate for the screen you are on, it sounds a beep.

Anytime you are not sure of what voice commands are available on a screen, you can always say Help at any screen. The system can then read the list of commands to you.

You should use the voice control system as much as possible, and consider manual entry using the

as a back-up method of entry.

Most of the systems functions can be controlled by voice commands activated with the button. To control your compass system by voice:

Press and release the button. Wait for the beep. Give a voice command.

Once the microphone picks up your command, the system changes the display in response to the command and prompts you for the next command. Using the button, answer the prompts as required.

This button activates the voice control system. Press it when you want to give a voice command. See

on page for a list of voice commands.

This button has the same function as the CANCEL button on the center console (see page ). When you press it, the display returns to the previous screen. When the previous screen appears, the system replays the last prompt. This button can be used to cancel an audio, climate control, or compass system voice command up to one second after the command confirmation.

307

282

Voice Command Index

CONTINUED

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

Using the Voice Control System

interface dial

Talk

Talk

Talk

Talk Button

Back Button F eatures

305 2009 RL

Close the windows and the moonroof.

The fan speed will be automatically adjusted to low.

Make sure the airflow from the A/C vents does not interfere with the system microphone in the ceiling console. Place your hand over the microphone; if you feel any airflow, adjust the vents.

After pressing the button, wait for the beep, then give a voice command.

Give a voice command in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.

To achieve optimum voice recognition, the following guidelines should be followed:

Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are using. See Voice Command Index on page .

When you speak a command, the system generally either repeats the command as a confirmation or asks you for further information. If you do not wish to hear this feedback, you can turn it off. See the

setting in Setup (see page ).

If you hear a prompt such as Please use the interface dial to... or Please choose an area with the interface dial. the system is asking for input that cannot be done by voice.

307 296

Talk

Improving Voice Recognition

Voice Recognition Feedback

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

306

NOTE:

2009 RL

CONTINUED

The system accepts these commands on any screen.

The voice control system needs appropriate voice commands for controlling the climate control, the audio system, and the compass system.

If the system cannot recognize your command because of background noise, speak louder.

If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the system may not interpret your voice commands correctly.

If you speak a command with something in your mouth, or your voice is either too high or too husky, the system may misinterpret your voice commands.

If you are still having trouble with the voice control system, refer to

on the main menu screen.

(reads list of the commands for the displayed screen)

(displays set up screen) (displays the

compass screen) (displays the main

menu) (displays the

screen)

(to previous screen, same as CANCEL or BACK button)

(cancels current activity)

The voice command help option on the main menu lists many of the following controls. To avoid distraction while you are driving, the system can read the commands for you.

The commands are accessible at any time while driving and can be read to you so that you do not need to memorize all of them.

Help

Set up Display map guide

Display menu

Information trip computer Trip Computer Backward

Cancel What time is it? Calendar

Calculator Repeat voice Voice command help

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

Global Commands

Voice Command Index

Voice Command Help

F eatures

307 2009 RL

Temperature CommandsClimate control fresh air Climate control recirculate Climate control vent Climate control bi-level

Climate control floor Climate control floor and defrost Fan speed up Fan speed down Fan speed

Climate control full automatic

Climate control automatic

Climate control off Air conditioner on Air conditioner off Air conditioner Climate control defrost on Climate control defrost off Climate control defrost Rear defrost on Rear defrost off Rear defrost

Temperature degrees

Temperature up Temperature down Temperature max hot Temperature max cold

Temperature balance Drive temperature degrees

Passenger temperature degrees

Drive vent temperature adjustment Passenger vent temperature adjustment Vent temperature up Vent temperature down Vent temperature max Vent temperature minimum Vent temperature normal

The system accepts these commands on most screens.

(vent and floor)

( : 1 7) (for best voice control, keep fan speed at 1 or 2)

Repeating these commands switches (toggles) the function between On and Off.

The system accepts these climate control commands on most screens.

(controls temperature to 72 degrees F)

(controls temperature to your selection)

( : 57 to 87 degrees F)

(displays HI) (displays

LO)

( : 57 to 87 degrees F)

( : 57 to 87 degrees F) :

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

Climate Control Commands

308 2009 RL

The system accepts these audio system commands on most screens.

The commands for vent temperature settings are available on the climate control screen.

Repeating these commands switches (toggles) the function between On and Off.

There are no voice commands for XM radio.

(or )

( : frequency. Example

( : frequency. Example

(same as Radio

) ( : 1 6)

( : 1 6) ( : 1 6) ( : 1 6)

( : 1 6)

To control the radio system, say one of the following commands: Repeating these commands

switches (toggles) the function between On and Off.

:

:

CONTINUED

Audio on Audio off Audio Radio on Radio play Radio off Radio Radio select FM1 Radio select FM2 Radio select AM Radio FM

Radio 95.5 FM) Radio AM

Radio 1020 AM) Radio seek up Radio seek down Radio next station

seek Radio preset Radio FM preset Radio FM1 preset Radio FM2 preset Radio AM preset Radio auto select Radio scanRadio Commands

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

Audio System Commands

F eatures

309

NOTE:

2009 RL

Repeating these commands switches (toggles) the function between On and Off.

The system accepts these commands on most screens.

( : 1 6) ( : 1 30)

( 1: 1 6, 2: 1 30)

(resumes Play from these commands: DVD track random, DVD track repeat, DVD disc repeat, DVD folder random, and DVD folder

repeat)

( : 1 6) ( : 1 30)

( 1: 1 6, 2: 1 30)

(resumes Play from these commands: CD track random, CD track repeat, and CD disc repeat)

The system accepts these commands on most screens.

Repeating these commands switches (toggles) the function between On and Off.

:

: DVD play DVD play disc DVD play track DVD play disc 1 track 2

DVD skip forward DVD skip back DVD play next disc DVD play previous disc DVD track random DVD track repeat DVD disc repeat DVD track scan DVD disc scan DVD normal play

DVD track list DVD folder random DVD folder repeat DVD folder list

CD Commands

CD play CD play disc CD play track CD play disc 1 track 2

CD skip forward CD skip back CD play next disc CD play previous disc CD track random CD track repeat CD disc repeat CD track scan CD disk scan CD normal play

CD track list CD folder random CD folder repeat CD folder scan CD folder list

DVD Commands

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

310 2009 RL

CONTINUED

MP3/WMA Commands

MP3 play MP3 play disc MP3 play track MP3 play disc 1 track 2

MP3 skip forward MP3 skip back MP3 play next disc MP3 play previous disc MP3 track random MP3 track repeat MP3 disc repeat MP3 track scan MP3 disc scan MP3 normal play

MP3 track list MP3 folder random MP3 folder repeat

MP3 folder list WMA play WMA play disc WMA play track WMA play disc 1 track 2

WMA skip forward WMA skip back WMA play next disc WMA play previous disc WMA track random WMA track repeat WMA disc repeat WMA track scan WMA disc scan WMA normal play

WMA track list WMA folder random WMA folder repeat WMA folder list

The system accepts these commands on most screens.

( : 1 6) ( : 1 30)

( 1: 1 6, 2: 1 30)

(resumes Play from these commands: MP3 track random, MP3 track repeat, MP3 disc repeat, MP3 folder random, and MP3 folder repeat)

( : 1 6) ( : 1 30)

( 1: 1 6, 2: 1 30)

(resumes Play from these commands: WMA track random, WMA track repeat, WMA disc repeat, WMA folder random, and WMA folder repeat)

Repeating these commands switches (toggles) the function between On and Off.

:

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system) F

eatures

311 2009 RL

The system accepts over 100 on- screen commands. The only commands that must be chosen by the interface dial are listed below.

The system accepts these commands on the first setup screen. (For the second and third setup screens, simply say what is written on the screen, and follow the voice prompts)

These are additional commands not found on the

screen. Follow the voice prompts.

(the system reads and lists all of the commands) Next

Previous Return OK Delete

Brightness up Brightness down Brightness minimum/min. Brightness maximum/max. Contrast up Contrast down Contrast minimum/min Contrast maximum/max Black level up Black level down Black level minimum/min Black level maximum/max Volume up Volume down Volume minimum/min. Volume maximum/max. Volume Off Interface Dial feedback off Interface Dial feedback auto

Interface Dial feedback on

Voice command help

Calendar Calculator Trip computer

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

On-Screen Commands

Set up Screen CommandsMain Menu Screen Commands

Voice Commands Help

312 2009 RL

To set the clock, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, and either or both remotes must be linked.

Say Set up or press the SET UP button on the center console to display the Set up screen. Then move the interface dial to the right.

Select the by turning the interface knob to the right, then press the center of the interface selector.

Select the , then press the center of the interface selector. The display changes to the

screen for HOUR.

CONTINUED

Setting the Clock

Clock Adjustment Time Adjustment

Time Adjustment

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system) F

eatures

313 2009 RL

To adjust the hour, turn the interface knob, then press the center of the interface selector.

Turn the interface knob to adjust the minute.

To adjust the minute, turn the interface knob to the right to display the adjustment screen for MINUTE.

Press the center of the interface selector to enter the time. The screen will return to the

screen (see page ).313

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

Clock adjustment

314 2009 RL

The security system will not set if the hood, trunk, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the Door and Trunk Open monitor on the instrument panel (see page ) to see if the doors and trunk are fully closed. Since it is not part of the monitor display, manually check the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and a combination of headlights, parking/side marker lights, and taillights flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle or remove the radio. This alarm continues for 2 minutes, then the system resets. To reset an alarming system before the 2 minutes have elapsed, unlock either front door with the remote or the built-in key.

With the system set, you can still open the trunk with the remote without triggering the alarm. The alarm will sound if the trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is opened with the trunk release button on the drivers door or the emergency trunk opener.

Once the security system is set, opening any door or the hood without using the built-in key or the remote will cause it to sound. It also sounds if the radio is removed from the dashboard or the audio system wiring is cut.

The security system automatically sets 15 seconds after you lock the doors, close the hood, and close the trunk. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors from the outside with the remote, built-in key, lock tab, or door lock switch. The security system indicator on the instrument panel starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself.

13

Security System F

eatures

315

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

2009 RL

Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. It is not recommended for city driving, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push in the CRUISE button or the ACC button (models with adaptive cruise control) on the steering wheel. The CRUISE MAIN or green ACC indicator (models with ACC) indicator on the instrument panel comes on.

To switch from ACC to cruise control, press the distance button

on the steering wheel, and hold it for 1 second (see page ).

Accelerate to the desired cruising speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the SET/ DECEL button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL icon appears on the multi- information display to show the system is now activated.

1.

2.

3.

333

On models with adaptive cruise control

Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

316

RES/ ACCEL BUTTON

CRUISE (ACC) BUTTON

SET/ DECEL BUTTON

Non-ACC model is shown

Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

2009 RL

You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:

You can decrease the set cruising speed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. When you reach the desired cruising speed, release the button.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed, then press the SET/ DECEL button.

Press and hold the SET/DECEL button. Release the button when you reach the desired speed.

To increase your speed in very small amounts, tap the RES/ ACCEL button. Each time you do this, the vehicle speeds up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up and down hills. If your speed increases going down a hill, use the brakes to slow down. This will cancel cruise control. On models with adaptive cruise control (ACC), this also causes the cruise control icon on the multi-information display to go off and the cruise mode icon to come on. To resume the set speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL icon on the multi- information display will come back on.

When climbing a steep hill, the automatic transmission may downshift to hold the set speed.

To slow down in very small amounts, tap the SET/DECEL button. Each time you do this, your vehicle will slow down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly with your foot. The CRUISE CONTROL icon on the multi- information display will go out. When the vehicle slows to the desired speed, press the SET/ DECEL button.

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control F

eatures

317 2009 RL

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal causes cruise control to cancel.

Even with cruise control on, you can still use the accelerator pedal to speed up for passing. After completing the pass, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will return to the set cruising speed.

You can cancel cruise control in any of these ways:

Push the CRUISE (ACC) button.

When you push the CANCEL button or tap the brake pedal, the system remembers the previously set speed. To return to that speed, accelerate to above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press and release the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL [ACC (green)] indicator comes on. The vehicle accelerates to the same speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE (ACC) button turns the system completely off and erases the previous cruising speed.

Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

318

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE (ACC) BUTTON

Non-ACC model is shown

2009 RL

The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision mitigation brake system (CMBS). For more information on the radar sensor, see page . For more information on CMBS, see page .

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) consists of a radar sensor in the front grille, the ACC buttons on the steering wheel, and the ACC functions of the multi-information display.

420 419

If equipped ACC Components

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) F

eatures

319

ACC INDICATORMULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

ACC BUTTON

DISTANCE BUTTON

SET/DECEL BUTTON

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

2009 RL

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) allows you to maintain a set speed and keep the vehicle ahead of you and your vehicle at a safe distance without having to use the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down suddenly or another vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle, ACC alerts you by sounding a beeper and displaying a message on the multi- information display. The ACC radar sensor in the front grille can detect and monitor the distance of a vehicle up to 328 feet (100 meters) ahead of your vehicle. For more information on the radar sensor, see page .

Do not use ACC under these conditions:

In poor visibility. In heavy traffic. When you must slow down and speed up repeatedly. On winding roads. When you enter a toll gate, interchange, service area, parking area, etc. In these areas, there is no vehicle ahead of you, and ACC would still try to accelerate to your set speed. In bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) On a slippery road (for example a road covered with ice or snow).

As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Inappropriate use of ACC can result in a serious accident. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and other vehicles.

When the vehicle ahead of you slows down or speeds up, ACC senses the change in distance and compensates by accelerating or braking your vehicle to reach the cruising speed you previously set. The distance between vehicles is based on your speed: the faster you go, the longer the distance will be; the slower you go, the shorter it will be.

420

Overview

Important Safety Precautions

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

320 2009 RL

When there is no vehicle ahead within ACC range

When a vehicle ahead is within ACC range and going slower than your set speedYour vehicle will maintain a set

cruising speed. If the vehicle ahead of you is going slower than your set speed, your vehicle will slow down to the speed of that vehicle. Your vehicle will then follow at a constant distance until the vehicle ahead changes speed again.

CONTINUED

Operating Characteristics

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) F

eatures

321

Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.

Use ACC only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

2009 RL

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi- information display to warn you.

Your vehicle follows the vehicle ahead of it, keeping a constant distance. ACC will not keep your vehicle at a constant distance if the vehicle ahead of you goes out of range of your set speed.

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down and changes lanes, ACC no longer tracks it. Your vehicle will then return to your set speed.

In this case, decelerate your vehicle by pressing the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate distance from the vehicle ahead.

When a vehicle ahead is within ACC range and going at a steady speed

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

322 2009 RL

ACC does not work below 25 mph (40 km/h). It cannot bring your vehicle to a complete stop.

ACC will not sound a beeper or display a message on the multi- information display to warn you of vehicles going slower than 13 mph (20 km/h) or vehicles that are parked. In these cases, it is up to you to maintain a safe distance by using the brake pedal.

ACC may not recognize motorcycles or other small vehicles ahead of your vehicle.

ACC may react to vehicles beside you or even a building beside you by momentarily applying the brakes or sounding a beeper under conditions such as a sudden curve or narrowing of the road, an abrupt movement of the steering wheel, or if you are in an unusual position within your lane.

Limitations

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) F

eatures

323 2009 RL

Push the ACC button on the steering wheel. The ACC indicator on the instrument panel comes on, and ACC is shown on the multi- information display.

Accelerate to the desired speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the SET/ DECEL button on the steering wheel, then release the accelerator pedal.

If you press the SET/DECEL button when the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h), you will hear a beep about 1 second. This means ACC is not activated, and you cannot set your speed.

When your speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h), ACC goes into wait mode, and ACC is shown on the multi- information display.

1.

2.

3.

Using the ACC

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

324

ACC BUTTON

SET/DECEL BUTTON

2009 RL

When the speed is set, it is shown along with a vehicle icon and distance bars on the multi- information display. Refer to page for how to set and change the set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you.

If you change the speed unit measurement from the factory default setting, the initial speed unit measurement is shown under the current unit.

To change the speed unit measurement from mph to km/h, see page .

328

92

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) F

eatures

325

SET VEHICLE SPEED

U.S.

CANADA CANADA

U.S.

SET VEHICLE DISTANCE INITIAL SPEED UNIT

2009 RL

The set speed can be increased by using the RES/ACCEL button or the accelerator pedal.

To increase the set speed with the RES/ACCEL button, do this:

Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. The vehicle will accelerate. When you reach the speed you want, release the button.

To increase your speed in small amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button repeatedly. Each time you do this, your vehicle will speed up about 1 mph (1 km/h).

While the vehicle accelerates to the set speed, the set speed on the multi- information display will flash.

If a vehicle ahead of you is driving at a slower speed than the speed you want to set, your vehicle will not accelerate; it will keep some distance between your vehicles.

To increase the set speed with the accelerator pedal, do this:

Press the accelerator pedal to increase to the speed you want, then press the SET/DECEL button. The set speed will be shown on the multi- information display. If you do not press the SET/DECEL button, your vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

The ACC beeper will not sound while you press the accelerator pedal, no matter how close you get to the vehicle ahead of you.

Increasing the Set Speed

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

326

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

2009 RL

The set speed can be decreased using the SET/DECEL button or the brake pedal.

To decrease the set speed with the SET/DECEL button, do this:

Press and hold the SET/DECEL button. Release the button when you reach the speed you want.

To slow down in small amounts, tap the SET/DECEL button repeatedly.

Each time you do this, your vehicle slows down about 1 mph (1 km/h).

When the system detects a vehicle ahead of you, a beeper sounds once and a solid-line vehicle icon appears on the multi-information display.

The set cruising speed will be shown on the multi-information display.

On a steep downhill, the vehicle speed may exceed the set cruising speed.

To decrease the set speed with the brake pedal, do this:

Tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle slows down to the speed you want, press the SET/DECEL button. The set speed will be shown on the multi-information display. If you use the brake pedal to decrease speed, and then press the RES/ACCEL button, your vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

CONTINUED

Decreasing the Set Speed Detecting a Vehicle Ahead of You

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) F

eatures

327

SET/DECEL BUTTON

U.S.

CANADA

2009 RL

With ACC on, the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is controlled and maintained. You can change this distance to one of three ranges: long, middle, or short.

To change the range, press the DISTANCE button. Each time you press the button, the range changes from Long, to Middle, and then to Short.

The higher your vehicle speed is, the longer the distance between the vehicle in front will be set as shown below.

When that vehicle changes lanes or goes out of ACC range, a beeper sounds once. If there is no vehicle ahead of you within ACC range, a dotted-line vehicle icon will be on the multi-information display. To set the ACC beeper on or off, see page .90

50 mph (80 km/h)

154 feet 47 meters 111 feet

34 meters 85 feet

26 meters

65 mph (104 km/h)

200 feet 61 meters 173 feet

42 meters 101 feet

31 meters

Speed Vehicle Distance

Long

Middle

Short

Changing Vehicle Distance

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

328

DISTANCE BUTTONU.S.

CANADA

2009 RL

Press the ACC button. The ACC indicator in the instrument panel goes off.

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel.

If you cancel ACC by pressing the ACC button, the previously set cruising speed is erased from memory.

The distance you select is also shown on the multi-information display.

ACC is canceled whenever you do any of these actions:

When you push the CANCEL button or tap the brake pedal to cancel ACC, the set cruising speed stays in memory. When you turn on ACC again, the speed is shown on the multi-information display. To return to that speed, accelerate to over 25 mph (40 km/h), then press the RES/ ACCEL button.

Canceling the ACC

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) F

eatures

329

LONG RANGE

MIDDLE RANGE

SHORT RANGE

CANCEL BUTTON

U.S.

CANADA

U.S.

CANADA

U.S.

CANADA

2009 RL

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the ACC system. If this happens, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked.

The ACC system cannot be used while this indicator is on.

The vehicle speed decreases below 22 mph (35 km/h).

Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.

When the VSA indicator comes on.

When the ABS or VSA is activated.

Abrupt steering wheel movement.

If ACC is cancelled by any these conditions, wait until the condition improves, then press the RES/ ACCEL button to restore ACC. When you do this, the vehicle will resume its set cruising speed.

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) position after ACC was automatically cancelled, the set speed is erased, and you must enter it again (see page ).

Poor weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.

The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.

An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.

When ACC is automatically canceled, the beeper sounds about 1 second, and an ACC OFF message appears on the multi-information display for 3 seconds.

Any of these conditions may cause ACC to cancel:

324

Automatic ACC Cancellation ACC Indicator

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

330

ACC INDICATOR

2009 RL

The multi-information display shows various messages related to ACC. For a description of each ACC message you may see, refer to the chart on this and the following page.

Message

CONTINUED

Description

ACC is on.

ACC detects a vehicle ahead of you.

You will hear a beep when the vehicle moves out of the ACC radar sensors range.

ACC does not detect a vehicle ahead of you.

You will hear a beep when ACC detects a vehicle ahead of you.

Messages on the Multi-Information Display

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) F

eatures

331

U.S.

U.S.

CANADA

CANADA

2009 RL

Message Message DescriptionDescription

Apply the brakes immediately. Your vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead of it.

You will hear a continuous beep.

ACC needs to be checked.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

ACC has automatically cancelled because its radar sensor in the front grill is dirty.

You will hear a beep about 1 second.

ACC has automatically cancelled because of bad weather or other conditions.

You will hear a beep about 1 second.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

332 2009 RL

To switch from ACC to cruise control, press the distance button on the steering wheel, and hold it for 1 second.

Always be aware which mode is selected.

When the cruise control is selected, ACC does not sound a beeper or display a message on the multi- information display. Make sure to keep a safe distance from the vehicle ahead of you.

When you press the button, you will see CRUISE MODE SELECTED on the multi-information display for 2 seconds. To switch back to ACC, press and hold the distance button again for 1 second.

Switching to Cruise Control

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) F

eatures

333

DISTANCE BUTTON

Press the distance button.

2009 RL

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver built into your vehicle can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

Before programming your HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an electronic eye, or other safety and reverse stop features.

If your garage door was manufactured before April 1, 1982, you may not be able to program HomeLink to operate it. These units do not have safety features that cause the motor to stop and reverse it if an obstacle is detected during closing, increasing the risk of injury. Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features.

Units manufactured between April 1, 1982 and January 1, 1993 may be equipped with safety stop and reverse features. If your unit does not have an external entrapment protection system, an easy test to confirm the function and performance of the safety stop and reverse feature is to lay a 2 4 under the closing door. The door should stop and reverse upon contacting the piece of wood. As an additional safety feature, garage door openers manufactured after January 1, 1993 are required to have external entrapment protection systems, such as an electronic eye, which detect an object obstructing the door.

Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener

to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have this information, contact the manufacturer of the equipment. Before programming HomeLink to a garage door or gate opener, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential injury or damage. When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage.

If you just received your vehicle and have not trained any of the buttons in HomeLink before, you should erase any previously learned codes before training the first button. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons on the HomeLink transceiver for about 10 20 seconds, until the red indicator flashes. Release the buttons, then proceed to step 1.

General Safety Information

Important Safety Precautions

Training HomeLink

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Before you begin

334 2009 RL

If the red indicator in HomeLink begins to flash slowly at first, then rapidly, release both buttons, and go to step 4. If the red indicator in HomeLink continues to flash slowly (does not flash rapidly), your remote transmitter may stop transmitting after a short time. Go to step 3.

Press and hold the remote transmitter button and one of the HomeLink buttons at the same time. While continuing to hold the HomeLink button, press and release the remote transmitter button every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLink begins to flash slowly at first, then rapidly, release both buttons, and go to step 4.

Press and hold the remote transmitter button and one of the HomeLink buttons at the same time.

If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

Hold the end of the garage door opener remote transmitter 1 to 3 inches from HomeLink. Make sure you are not blocking your view of the red indicator in HomeLink.

If the red indicator in HomeLink continues to flash slowly (does not begin to flash rapidly), repeat steps 1 thru 3.

Test the HomeLink button by pushing it for about 1 second.

If the button works, programming is complete. If the button does not work go to step 5.

Push and hold the HomeLink button and watch the red indicator on HomeLink.

If the indicator stays on, press the HomeLink button again; the remotely controlled device should operate. If the indicator flashes rapidly for 2 seconds then stays on, you have a rolling code transmitter: go to Training with a Rolling Code System (see page ).

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

336 CONTINUED

HomeLink Universal Transceiver F

eatures

335

RED INDICATOR

2009 RL

Make sure you have properly completed the Training HomeLink procedure.

Find the learn button on your garage door opener unit. The location will vary, depending on the manufacturer.

Press the learn button on the garage door opener unit until the indicator next to the button comes on. The indicator may blink, or come on and stay on. You then

have approximately 30 seconds to complete the following steps.

Press and hold the button on HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press the HomeLink button again for about 1 second. It should operate the garage door.

Repeat these steps to train the other two HomeLink buttons to operate any other compatible remotely controlled devices around your home (lighting, automatic gate, security system, etc.).

The Training HomeLink procedure trains HomeLink to the proper garage door opener code. The following procedure synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener so it sends and receives the correct codes.

For security purposes, newer garage door opening systems use a rolling or variable code. Information from the remote control and the garage door opener is needed before HomeLink can operate the garage door opener.

2. 4.

5.

1.

3.

6.

Training With a Rolling Code System

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

336

LEARN BUTTON

2009 RL

You should erase all three codes before selling the vehicle.

To erase the codes stored in all three buttons, press and hold the two outside buttons until the red indicator begins to flash, then release the buttons.

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:

If a standard transmitter was programmed, the indicator will stay on for about 25 seconds.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

If you have problems with training the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, or would like information on home products that can be operated by HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On the Internet, go to

If a rolling code transmitter was previously programmed, the indicator will flash rapidly for 2 seconds, and then stay on for about 23 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLink button to be trained until the HomeLink indicator begins to flash slowly.

Once the HomeLink indicator begins to flash slowly, continue to hold the HomeLink button, and follow steps 2 thru 5 under Training HomeLink (see page

).

1.

2.

334

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

www.homelink.com.

Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button Client Assistance

HomeLink Universal Transceiver F

eatures

337 2009 RL

AcuraLink enhances your ownership experience by providing a direct communication link between your vehicle and the Acura Server. Working through the XM radio satellite, AcuraLink works in conjunction with the navigation system, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL), and audio system in your vehicle. It displays and receives several kinds of messages, including:

Operating tips and information on your vehicles features.

Most AcuraLink functions are controlled by the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a knob and a selector.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

Important recall and safety information.

Maintenance information to keep your vehicle in top condition.

Diagnostic information to provide information about any problems with your vehicle.

RL Technology Package models Interface Dial

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

338

KNOB

SELECTOR

ENTER

2009 RL

If you have new messages, an envelope icon appears in the top right corner of the navigation screen.

To open a message: Press ENTER on the interface selector, then select New Message from the navigation system map menu.

A list of all messages will be shown. New Messages will be at the top. Select the message you want to read by pressing ENTER.

To view previously read messages:

Press the INFO button. The information screen will be shown.

A red exclamation will be marked on an envelope icon with an important message.

CONTINUED

Reading Messages

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

339 2009 RL

Select Messages, then select a message category by pressing ENTER. Select the message you want to read and press ENTER.

Unread messages have a closed envelope icon next to them. The icon disappears when it has already been read.

Only Diagnostic appear on messages screen while driving. They indicate your vehicle has a problem that may need immediate attention (see page ).

After purchasing your vehicle, messages may not appear immediately.

When you open a message, you can read a summary of it, and then choose one of several options. If an option is not available for a message, that option will not be highlighted.

Your dealer has to register the vehicle identification before you can receive messages. This can take several days to process.

341

Message Options

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

340

NOTE:

2009 RL

Select this option to delete the current message.

Select this option to hear a voice read the entire message. This gives you more information than the screen can display at one time. When you select the Voice option, it changes to a Stop Reading option. Select the option again to stop the voice.

Select this option to call a phone number embedded in the message. When you select , the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) dials the number for you.

To make a call, your Bluetooth compatible phone must be paired to the vehicles HandsFreeLink system, powered on, and located within the vehicle (see page ).

Select this option to get more information about the current diagnostic message. To use this option, your cellphone must be paired with the HFL. In addition, the paired phone must have a compatible data service and be set up with the AcuraLink system to make a data connection. Access the handsfreelink.com website to find out which data services are currently compatible with AcuraLink.

To set your AcuraLink preferences (the types of messages you want to receive, if any), visit the My Acura website at , and choose what you would like to receive. If you do not have internet access, call Acura Client Services at (800) 382-2238; they can set your message preferences for you.

Select this option to find the nearest Acura dealer using the navigation system.

Select this option to call the Acura dealer you purchased your vehicle from. AcuraLink also directs you to this dealer so you can schedule a maintenance appointment or receive information about a message. If your assigned servicing dealer changes, AcuraLink will reset to call that dealer.

347

www.owners.acura.com

Delete

Voice

Call

Call

Diagnostic Info

Message Preferences

Find Nearest Dealer

Call Your Dealer

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

341 2009 RL

Diagnostic info and recall/ campaign messages can only be deleted by your dealer.

To delete a single message: Press the INFO button to bring up the Information screen.

Scroll to the Messages option, then select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Select the message category that contains the message you want to delete.

Use the interface knob to scroll up or down to the message title you want to delete, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to Delete with the interface knob, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

To delete all messages:

The Delete All Messages command does not apply to Diagnostic Info and Recall messages. They can only be deleted by your dealer.

Press the SETUP button to view the setup screen.

Use the interface knob to scroll to the AcuraLink/Messages option, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the Delete Messages option, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the category with the messages you want to delete, and select the category by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Select Other by pushing the interface selector to the right.

Deleting Messages

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

342

NOTE: NOTE:

2009 RL

These messages, based on updated vehicle information and comments from other RL owners, supplement your Owners Manual and Quick Start Guide. They provide you with relevant information for a safe and enjoyable ownership experience. For additional information, call Acura Client Services directly through the HFL.

There are six message categories in AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature Guide, Maintenance Minder, Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info, and Scheduled Dealer Appointment. The system can store up to 255 messages.

Message categories can be added, revised, or deleted through broadcast messages from Acura.

During the first 90 days of ownership, one of up to 28 different messages appears each day. These messages help you to use and understand the features of your vehicle.

Message Categories Quick Tips Feature Guide

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

343 2009 RL

These messages provide detailed information about the service needed for your vehicle. When a maintenance message appears on the multi-information display, a list of needed maintenance items is provided through an AcuraLink message. These messages tell you the exact maintenance needed, helping you to avoid unnecessary maintenance costs.

You can use the following message options:

Make an appointment from the schedule at the dealer.

Reschedule the appointment with the dealer.

Call your dealer for an appointment.

Find the nearest dealer.

You can make an appointment with your dealer through the AcuraLink when you receive a maintenance minder message.

To use the automated appointment function, you should visit the My Acura website at

, register some required settings, and complete the Phone-Data Connection set-up (see page ). Your Bluetooth compatible phone should also be paired and linked to your vehicles Bluetooth HFL (see page ).355

353

www.owners.acura.com

Maintenance Minder Automated Appointment

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

344 2009 RL

CONTINUED

When you see the maintenance minder message on the multi- information display, you will also receive a message in the navigation screen. Select AcuraLink/ Messages on the Setup screen, then press ENTER.

Select the received message, then press ENTER. You will see the message as shown. To make an appointment, select Schedule Dealer Appt. then press ENTER.

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you an appropriate appointment date and time on the navigation screen. If you accept this appointment, select Confirm Appointment, then press ENTER.

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

345 2009 RL

The confirmation message will be displayed on the screen. Make sure to confirm the appointment date, time and dealer. If it is OK, press ENTER.

If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date, select Cancel, then press ENTER.

Select AcuraLink/Messages on the Setup screen, then press ENTER. Select Scheduled Dealer Appointment, then press ENTER.

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you a new appointment date and time on the navigation screen. If you accept this appointment, select Confirm Appointment, then press ENTER.

You will see the screen to reschedule as shown. To make an appointment, select Reschedule Appointment, then press ENTER.

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

To reschedule the appointment: Scheduled Dealer Appointment

346 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Select AcuraLink/Messages on the Setup screen, then press ENTER. Select Appointment Message, then press ENTER. You will see the screen to cancel as shown. To cancel the appointment, select Cancel Appointment, then press ENTER.

The system will request you to confirm the cancel on the navigation screen. To cancel the appointment, select YES, then press ENTER. If you select NO, the screen goes back to the previous message display.

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you the confirmation on the navigation screen. If you accept the cancel, press ENTER.

To cancel the appointment:

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

347 2009 RL

Using automated appointment, your registered dealer through My Acura is automatically selected. If you want to select another dealer, such as in case of an emergency, find the nearest dealer and call the dealer directly with the HFL.

When a maintenance appointment is due soon, you will also receive an appointment reminder message.

If you select the cancel appointment, you cannot try to reschedule the appointment. If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date, call your dealer directly with the HFL.

If your vehicle is affected by a recall or other important safety information, a letter will be mailed to you about the issue and how to fix it. If you dont get your vehicle fixed, you will also receive a reminder message through AcuraLink. You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

Recall/Campaigns

348 2009 RL

When any indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the MID, AcuraLink immediately notifies you with the message, An indicator is on. AcuraLink can help you decide what to do.

If you do not want the information right away, select the Check Later option.

For this reason, it is important that we retain your current phone number. Please update your information using My Acura at

The AcuraLink system cannot determine some mechanical problems (such as squeaks or rattles) that are not triggered by the diagnostic indicator monitors.

When an indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the Multi- Information Display (MID), AcuraLink can provide information about the cause of the indicator or message and the recommended action to address it. This helps you handle the problem as it occurs, preventing or limiting costly repairs.

For more information on the instrument panel indicators, see page

.61

www.owners.acura.com.

Diagnostic Info

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

349 2009 RL

If you want the information now, select the Check Now option. (If the navigation screen is not active, you must select OK from the navigation disclaimer screen before you can check the information.)

You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.

Depending on the severity of the problem, the message will let you know if you should see your dealer immediately or if you can wait until a later date.

When viewing a diagnostic info message through the INFO menu, you can use the Diagnostic Info option to connect to the Acura server and retrieve the latest information regarding the problem.

There may not be any additional information, depending on the time elapsed since the previous time you retrieved the information from the Acura server.

When you make an appointment through My Acuras online Schedule Service Appointment, you can be reminded in advance about that appointment through AcuraLink.

If you need to reschedule or cancel the appointment, see page .346

Reminder Message

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

350

NOTE:

2009 RL

Turning the Automated Appointment preference off will disable appointment notifications in the vehicle based on appointments created or changed at My Acuras online scheduling website.

Appointments can still be created, rescheduled, and canceled from the vehicle; however the appointment information stored in the vehicle will not be updated. Any changes to those appointments should be made from the My Acura website.

AcuraLink/Message Screen

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

351 2009 RL

To access the following functions, press the SETUP option, push the interface selector to the right to select Other, then rotate the interface knob to select AcuraLink/ Messages.

Select this option to delete all stored messages within a category, except for diagnostic info and recall campaign messages. These messages can only be deleted by a certified technician after the recall is done or the problem is corrected, or through a broadcast message from Acura.

Select ON if you want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon appears on the navigation screen). Select OFF if you do not want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon does not appear on the screen). Messages can still be accessed using the INFO menu. If you would like to stop receiving messages, visit the My Acura website at

to change your messaging preferences.

www.owners. acura.com

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

Delete Messages New Message Notification

352 2009 RL

Select this option to begin the process required to connect to Acura. This is used to access the most recent diagnostic information when a problem occurs.

For the Phone Data Connection button to be active, you need a Bluetooth compatible and enabled cellphone paired to the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL). To complete the data connection setup, the paired phone must have a compatible data service.

Select ON to have the system automatically read each message to you. Select OFF to manually select the Voice option when you want a message read to you.

CONTINUED

Phone-Data ConnectionAuto Reading

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

353

NOTE:

2009 RL

The default setting is prompt. When a diagnostic info message appears, and you select the Check Now option, the system will prompt you before connecting to the Acura server. If you do not wish to connect at that time, select No at the prompt, and you will see the information from the onboard database. The Auto setting will remove the prompt when you select the Check Now option and will automatically connect to the Acura server. This setting only applies when you have a Bluetooth enabled phone that is paired with the HFL and you have completed the Phone-Data Connection setup.

To find more information on Bluetooth compatible and enabled cell phones, visit

or call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call 1-866-78- ACURA.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

Connect to the Acura Server

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

354 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Here are the main features of HFL. Instructions for using HFL begin on page .

HFL recognizes simple voice commands, such as phone numbers and names. It uses these commands to automatically dial, receive, and store numbers. For more information on voice control, see Using Voice Control on page .

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Bluetooth is the wireless technology that links your phone to HFL. HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which means the maximum range between your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 meters).

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL uses Bluetooth technology to link your cell phone to your vehicle. With HFL, you can place and receive calls through your vehicles audio system, without the distraction of handling your cell phone. To use this feature, you need a Bluetooth- compatible cell phone with the Hands Free Profile. For more information, and a list of compatible cell phones, visit

, or call 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call 1-866-78-ACURA. The HFL is available in English on U.S. models, and in both English and French on Canadian models. To change the language, see page .

358

356

379

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

Voice Control Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

355 2009 RL

To operate the HFL, use the HFL Talk and Back buttons on the left side of the steering wheel. Below the HFL buttons is another set of voice control buttons for the navigation, climate control, and audio systems.

Here are the main components of the HFL:

The HFL microphone is on the ceiling console. The microphone is shared with the navigation system (if equipped).

When HFL is in use, the sound comes through the vehicles front audio system speakers. If the audio system is in use while operating either of the HFL buttons or making a call, HFL overrides the audio system. To change the volume level, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

With a linked phone, HFL allows you to send and receive calls in your vehicle without holding the phone.

HFL can store up to 50 names and phone numbers in its phonebook. With a linked phone, you can then automatically dial any name or number in the phonebook.

To use the HFL, your phone must have approved Bluetooth capability along with the Hands Free Profile. This type of phone is available through many phone makers and cellular carriers. You can also find an approved phone by visiting

, or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call 1-866-78-ACURA.

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

HFL Buttons

Microphone

Audio System

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Phonebook

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

356

HFL TALK BUTTON

HFL BACK BUTTON

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

2009 RL

Signal Strength Indicates the network signal strength of the current phone. Five bars equals full strength.

ROAM Status Indicates your phone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicates the power currently remaining in your phones battery. Five bars equals full battery strength.

HFL Mode Indicates when you are dialing and receiving calls.

Phone Dialing Indicates the number you entered or the number of the incoming call.

Some phones do not send this information to HFL.

When you are operating HFL, or when you manually select HFL on the multi-information display, you will see this information on the screen:

Here is the function of each HFL button:

HFL Talk: This button is used before you give a command, to answer incoming calls, and to confirm system information.

HFL Back: This button is used to end a call, go back to the previous voice control command, and to cancel an operation.

:

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

357

SIGNAL STRENGTH

BATTERY LEVEL STATUS

HFL MODE

ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING

2009 RL

Here are some guidelines for using voice control:

To enter a command, press the Talk button. Then, after the beep, say your command in a clear, natural tone.

For best system operation, set the climate control fan speed to low, and direct the center vents away from the microphone in the ceiling.

If the HFL does not recognize a command, its response is, Pardon. If it doesnt recognize the command a second time, its response is, Please repeat. If it doesnt recognize the command a third time, it plays the Help prompt.

HFL is operated by the HFL Talk and Back buttons on the left side of the steering wheel. The next few pages provide instructions for all basic features of HFL.

With the HFL system activated, you will also see HF LINK on the upper display.

When you are dialing or receiving calls with the audio system in use, you will see the HFL screen on the navigation display.

Using Voice ControlHow to Use HFL

All phones may not operate identically, and some may cause inconsistent operation of HFL.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

358

NOTE:

2009 RL

When you finish a command sequence, the HFL goes back to its main menu. For example, when you store the name, Eric, the HFL response is, Eric has been stored. The next time you press the Talk button, you will be at the main menu.

If nothing is said while the HFL is listening for a command, the HFL will time out and stop its voice recognition. The next time you press the Talk button, the HFL begins listening from the point at which it timed out.

To go back one step in a command process, say, Go back, or press the Back button.

To end a command sequence at any time, press and hold the Back button, or press and release the Talk button, wait for the beep, and say, Cancel. The next time you press the Talk button, the HFL begins from its main menu.

Many commands can be spoken together. For example, you can say, Dial 123-456-7891.

To enter a string of numbers in a Call or Dial command, you can say them all at once, or you can separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7, 10, or 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press the Talk button while the HFL is speaking. The HFL will then begin listening for your next command.

To hear a list of available options at any time, press the Talk button, wait for the beep, and say, Hands free help.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

359 2009 RL

The HFL response continues A security option is available to lock the hands free system. Each time the vehicle is turned on, a passcode would be required to use this system. Would you like this security option turned on?

Press and release the Talk button. If you say Yes after the beep, the HFL system response is, Would you like the notification to be a ring tone or a prompt? If you say No after the beep, the HFL system returns to its main menu. Saying No will result in no ring tone or prompt playback during an incoming call. The audio system will be mute, and a message will be displayed.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Ring tone or Prompt. The HFL system response is A ring tone will be used. or An incoming call prompt will be used. If you choose Ring tone, you will hear a ring tone through the audio speakers to announce an incoming call. If you choose Prompt, you will hear this message to announce an incoming call: You have an incoming call.

The voice of the HFL can be set to male or female (U.S. models only). Also, the incoming notification can be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no notification.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say System. The HFL response is, System options are setup and clear.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Setup. The HFL response is Would you like male or female prompts?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Male or Female, depending on the system voice you want. The HFL response is, Male (Female) prompts have been selected. Would you like an audible notification of an incoming call?

Press and release the Talk button. If you say No after the beep, the HFL system response is, Security will not be used. The system setup is complete.

If you say Yes, you can set your passcode. Refer to the setting procedure in the next column.

4.

5.

6.

7.1.

2.

3.

To set up the system, do this:

Setting Up the System

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

360 2009 RL

The HFL will accept a numeric, four- digit passcode that you can use for security purposes.

Follow the system setup procedure as described previously.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes.

The HFL response is What is the four-digit number you would like to set as your passcode?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the four-digit passcode you want to use. For example, say 1, 2, 3, 4. The HFL response is 1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is Security is on. Each time the vehicle is turned on, the passcode will be required to use the system. The system setup is complete. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. If you say No. after the beep, the HFL response is Security will not be used. The system setup is complete.

Once a passcode is set, you can lock the HFL so it only operates after the passcode is entered.

The HFL will prompt you for your passcode each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position and you press the Talk button. You will only be asked for the passcode once per ignition

cycle. If the passcode is set, its response is The system is locked. What is the four-digit passcode?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say your four-digit passcode. For example, say 1, 2, 3, 4.

If the passcode is correct, the HFL response is Main menu. If the passcode is not correct, the HFL response is 1, 2, 3, 4 is incorrect. Please try again. Go back to the step 2.

If you forget your passcode and you cannot activate the HFL, consult your dealer to cancel the passcode.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

To set your passcode, do this:

To enter your passcode, do this;

Setting Your Passcode

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

361 2009 RL

HFL does not allow you to pair your phone if the vehicle is moving. For pairing, your phone must be in its Discovery mode. Up to six phones can be paired to HFL.

With your phone on and the ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. The HFL response is Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Pair. The HFL response is The pairing process requires operation of your mobile phone. For safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is stopped. State a four- digit code for pairing. Note this code. It will be requested by the phone.

During the pairing process, turn off any previously paired phones before pairing a new phone.

The following procedure works for most phones. If you cannot pair your phone to the HFL with this procedure, refer to your phones operating manual, visit

, call the Hands Free Link consumer support at (888) 528-7876, or call your phone retailer. In Canada, visit or call (866) 78- ACURA.

Your Bluetooth compatible phone with HandsFree Profile must be paired to the HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls. To confirm that your phone is Bluetooth compatible, visit

, or call 1-888- 528-7876. In Canada, visit

, or call 1-866-78-ACURA. Your phone retailer should also be able to confirm that your phone is Bluetooth compatible.

1.

2.

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

www. acura.com/handsfreelink

www.acura. ca

Pairing Your Phone

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

362

NOTE:

2009 RL

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you want to use. For example, say Erics phone. The HFL response is Erics phone has been successfully paired. Returning to the main menu.

If you want to pair another phone, repeat steps 1 through 7.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the four-digit code you want to use. For example, say 1, 2, 3, 4. The HFL response is, 1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL system response is Searching for a Bluetooth phone. Make sure the phone you are trying to pair is in discovery mode.

Steps 5 and 6 show a common way to get your phone into its Discovery mode. If these steps do not work on your phone, refer to the phones operating manual.

Follow the prompts on your phone to get it into its Discovery mode. The phone will search for the HFL. When it comes up, select HandsFreeLink from the list of options displayed on your phone.

When asked by the phone, enter the four-digit code from step 3 into your phone. The HFL response is A new phone has been found. What would you like to name this phone?

Once the pairing process is completed, AcuraLink may display a connection confirmation screen. This screen is used to create a data connection between your cell phone and the AcuraLink system. You can choose to set up the data connection now, or do it later. If you want to do it now, exit the HFL menu by pressing the HFL Back button one or more times.

4. 5.

6.

7.3.

8.

On vehicles with navigation system

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

363

NOTE:

2009 RL

To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this: Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. The HFL response is Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Edit. The HFL response is Which phone would you like to edit?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name of the phone you want to rename. For example, say Erics phone. The HFL response is What is the new name for Erics phone?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the new name of the phone. For example, say Lisas phone. The HFL response is, The name has been changed. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. The HFL response is, Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Delete. The HFL response is, Which phone would you like to delete?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name of the phone you want to delete. For example say Erics phone. The HFL response is Would you like to delete Erics phone?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is Preparing to delete Erics phone. Say OK to continue. Otherwise, say Go back, or Cancel.

Press and release the Talk button. If you say OK after the beep, the HFL response is The phone has been deleted. Returning to the main menu. If you say Go back, or Cancel, the phone will not be deleted.

2.

3.

4. 1. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

364 2009 RL

To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone being used, do this:

To change from the currently linked phone to another paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say Phone setup. The HFL response is Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. The HFL response is Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Next phone. The HFL response is Searching for the next phone. The HFL then disconnects the linked phone and searches for another paired phone. If no other phones are found, the first phone remains linked.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say List. The HFL responds by listing the name of each paired phone. When all phones paired to the system have been read, the HFL response is The entire list has been read. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Status. An example of the HFL response is, Erics phone is linked. Battery strength is three bars. Signal strength is five bars, and the phone is roaming. Returning to the main menu.

2.

1. 1.

2.

1.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

365 2009 RL

You can make calls using any phone number, or by using a name in the HFL phonebook. You can also redial the last number called. During a call, HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you remove the key from the ignition switch. Continuing a call without running the engine may discharge and weaken the vehicles battery.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you

want to call. For example, say Eric. The HFL response is Would you like to call Eric?

With your phone on and the ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call or Dial. The HFL response is, What name or number would you like to call/ dial? Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the number you want to call. For example, say 123 456 7891. The HFL response

is 123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or continue to add numbers. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call or Dial. The HFL response is Calling or Dialing. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob, or the steering wheel volume controls. To end the call, press the Back button.

With your phone on and the ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call or Dial. The HFL response is What name or number would you like to call/ dial?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is Calling or Dialing. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob. To end the call, press the Back button.

To redial the last number called by the phone, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Redial. The HFL response is, Redialing. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob, or the steering wheel volume controls.

1.

3. 3.

1.

2.

2.

4. 4. To make a call using a phone number, do this:

To make a call using a name in the HFL phonebook, do this:

Making a Call

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

366 2009 RL

If you receive a call when you are not on the phone, HFL interrupts the audio system (if it is on), and plays the incoming call notification, if activated. To answer the call, press the Talk button and begin speaking. If you dont want to answer the call, press the Back button.

HFL allows you to send numbers or names during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can also program account numbers into the HFL phonebook for easy retrieval during menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. The HFL response is, What name or number would you like to send?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the number you want to send. For example, say 1, 2, 3. The HFL response is 1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to add numbers.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. The dial tones will be sent, and the call will continue.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. The HFL response is, What name or number would you like to send?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you want to send. For example, say Account number. The HFL response is Would you like to send account number?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. The dial tones will be sent, and the call will continue.

If your phone has call waiting, and you receive a call when you are on the phone, press and release the Talk button to answer it. When you do this, the original call is placed on hold. To return to the original call, press the Talk button again. If you dont want to answer the new call, disregard it, and continue with your original call. If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call, press the Back button.

To send a pound ( ), say pound. To send a star (*), say star.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

3.

To send a number during a call, do this:

To send a name during a call, do this:

Receiving a CallSending Numbers or Names During a Call

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

367

NOTE:

2009 RL

During a call, you can transfer it from the HFL to your phone, or from your phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Transfer. The audio switches from the HFL to the phone.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Transfer. The audio switches from your phone to the HFL.

During a call, you can mute or unmute your voice to the person you are talking to.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Mute. The HFL response is, Mute is active.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Mute. The HFL response is, Mute is canceled.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Store. The HFL response is, What name would you like to store?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to store. For example, say Eric or say account number. The HFL response is What is the number for Eric, or What is the number for account number?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the number. For example, say 123 456 7891. The HFL response is 123 456 7891.

The HFL phonebook can store up to 50 names with their associated numbers. These can be any types of numbers. For example, you can store a phone number and use it to make a call, or you can store an account number and use it during a call to a menu-driven phone system.

2.

3.

1.

1.

2.

4.

2.

1.

To transfer a call from the HFL to your phone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to the HFL, do this:

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

To add a name, do this:Transferring a Call

Muting a Call

Setting Up the Phonebook

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

368 2009 RL

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is, The name has been deleted. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the new number for Eric. For example, say 987 654 3219. The HFL response is, 987 654 3219.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Enter. The HFL response is The number has been changed. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is, The Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Delete. The HFL response is, What name would you like to delete?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Enter. The HFL response is Eric (or account number) has been stored. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Edit. The HFL response is, What name would you like to edit?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to edit. For example, say Eric. The HFL response is What is the new number for Eric?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is, The Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to delete. For example, say Eric. The HFL response is Would you like to delete Eric?

2.

1.

4. 3.

4.5.

1. 2.

1.

3.

5.

To list all names in the phonebook, do this:

To delete a name, do this:

To edit the number of a name, do this:

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

369 2009 RL

To call a name from the phonebook list, do this:

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

To store a phone number from your phone:

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say List. The HFL responds by listing the names in the phonebook. When the end of the list is reached, the HFL response is, The entire list has been read. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say List. The HFL responds by listing the names in the phonebook. When it says the name you want to call, for example, Eric, press the Talk button, and then say Call. The HFL response is, Would you like to call Eric?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is Calling. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob, or the steering wheel volume controls.

You can store the desired number to the HFL phonebook directly from your cell phone.

Your phone may not have this capability. Visit

or call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit

, or call 1-866-78-ACURA. You can see your phones owners manual for information.

With your phone on and the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is, Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact and list.

2.

3.

1.

1.

2.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Storing a Phone Number Directly from Your Phone

370

NOTE:

2009 RL

If you want to continue to store any other numbers, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is, HFL is now waiting to receive a contact from a Bluetooth device.

Select a desired number from the list on your phone, and transmit/ send (individual steps will vary for each type of phone, refer to your phones owners manual) via Bluetooth. The HFL response is One phone number has been received for this contact. What name would you like to store for the mobile number? To discard this number, say Discard.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say either Yes or No. If you say Yes, the HFL response is, Neil at work has been stored. Would you like HFL to receive another contact? Go to step 6.

If you say No, the HFL response is Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to store. For example, say Neil at work. The HFL response is, Neil at work will be stored. Is this correct?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Receive contact. The HFL response is, The receive process requires operation of your Bluetooth device. For safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is stopped. HFL is now waiting to receive a contact from a Bluetooth device.

Select a desired number from the list on your phone, and transmit/ send (individual steps will vary for each type of phone, refer to your phones owners manual) via Bluetooth. The HFL response is One phone number has been received for this contact. What name would you like to store for the mobile number? To discard this number, say Discard.

5.

4. 6.

7.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

371 2009 RL

To use the cellular phonebook with HFL, select a Cellular Phonebook icon from the information screen. The navigation display will change as shown above.

If any phonebook is not stored and your phone is not linked to HFL, Cellular Phonebook icon is grayed out.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to store. For example, say Susan at work. The HFL response is, Susan at work will be stored. Is this correct?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say either Yes or No. The HFL response is Susan at work has been stored. Would you like HFL to receive another contact?

If you do not want to continue to store any other numbers, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say No. The HFL response is Returning to the main menu.

The cellular phonebook option allows you to store up to 1,000 names and 10,000 phone numbers in the phonebook of Bluetooth HandsFreeLink from your cellular phonebook. The maximum names and numbers to be stored varies on the data size. With HFL, you can then automatically dial any name or number in the phonebook.

Your phone may not have this capability. Visit

or call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit

, or call 1-866-78-ACURA. You can see your phones owners manual for information.

8.

9.

10. www.acura.com/

handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

Cellular Phonebook Options

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

372

NOTE:

2009 RL

To import the cellular phonebook You can import the phonebook of your cellular phone in the HFL. Link your phone to the HFL and select Import Cellular Phonebook from the Select an option screen. When the message The import was successful. is displayed, push in on the Interface Dial to select OK.

Search Imported Phonebook: This option allows you to search the phone numbers stored in HFL. When you enter a persons first name or last name, the system will find the number you want and let you make calls.

PIN Number: This option allows you to add, change, or remove a PIN number for any phonebook that has been imported.

Import Cellular Phonebook: This option allows you to store the phonebook of your cellular phone in HFL. When you link your phone to HFL and select this option, the system will start importing and loading the phonebook.

Delete Imported Phonebook: This option allows you to delete the stored phonebook from HFL. When you link your phone to HFL and select this option, the system will automatically delete the phonebook of the linked phone from HFL (see page ).

Before selling or discarding your vehicle, make sure to delete the imported phonebook data.

376

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

373

NOTE:

Example

2009 RL

Select a phonebook from the displayed list. If the phonebook you select has a PIN icon, you will need the four-digit PIN number to access the phonebook. The following screen will appear.

Enter the PIN number to access the phonebook. You cannot access a PIN protected phonebook if you do not use the correct PIN number.

You can search the stored number by entering keywords to make calls by using HFL.

Select Search Imported Phonebook from the Select an option screen. The display will change as shown above.

HFL does not allow you to pair your phone if the vehicle is moving. Up to six phones can be paired to HFL.

For information on linking to the HFL, see page .362

To search the imported phonebook

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

374

NOTE:

PIN ICON

IMPORTED DATEIMPORTED PHONEBOOK

2009 RL

Select the number (1 6) of the desired person from the list.

Up to three category icons are displayed in the right side of the list. These category icons indicate how many numbers are stored for the person. If a name has more than three category icons, is displayed.

The following category icons will appear:

Enter the keyword for a persons name, such as the first name or last name, using the Interface Dial. If the system does not find an exact match, say or select LIST when you finish entering the keyword.

The system will display a list of persons names, with the closest match to the name you entered at the top of the list.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

375

Home

Mobile

Preference

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

2009 RL

To delete the imported phonebookTo store a number in the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

You can delete the stored phonebook from the HFL. Link your phone to the HFL and select Delete Imported Phonebook from the Select an option screen. The display will change as shown above.

After selecting a person, the system will display a list of the persons phone numbers.

Select the desired number from the list to make a call.

Select the desired number from the list to store it in HFL.

Say or select STORE IN HandsFreeLink from the Select a number to call screen. The screen shown above will appear.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

376 2009 RL

To add, change, or remove a PIN number from any phonebook

You can add, change or remove a PIN number from any phonebook. Select PIN Number from the Select an Option screen. The display will change as shown above.

After you enter the correct PIN number, or if the phonebook you select is not PIN protected, the following screen appears.

Select Yes, and the message The imported phonebook has been deleted. will appear. Select OK to complete the deletion.

Select a phonebook from the displayed list. If the phonebook you select has a PIN icon, you will need the four-digit PIN number to access the phonebook. The following screen will appear.

Enter the PIN number to access the phonebook. You cannot access a PIN protected phonebook if you do not use the correct PIN number.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

377 2009 RL

To change a PIN numberTo add a PIN number

Select the phonebook that you wish to change the PIN number for. The display will change as shown above.

Enter the four-digit PIN number. You will be asked to re-enter the PIN to verify.

Select the phonebook you wish to add the PIN number to. When you select the phonebook without a PIN icon, the display will change as shown above.

Enter your current PIN number.

2. 1.1.

2.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

378 2009 RL

Enter your new four-digit PIN number. You will be asked to re- enter the PIN to verify.

This operation clears the HFL of your passcode, your paired phones, all names in the HFL phonebook, and all imported phonebooks. Clearing is recommended before you sell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say System. The HFL response is, System options are setup and clear.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Clear. The HFL response is, This process will clear all paired phones, clear all entries in the phonebook, clear the passcode, and restore the defaults in the system setup. Is this what you would like to do?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is Preparing to clear all paired phones, all phonebook entries, the passcode, and restore the defaults in the system setup. Say OK to proceed, otherwise say go back or cancel.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say OK to proceed, or say Go back or Cancel.

If you said OK, the HFL response is, Please wait while the system is cleared. This may take up to 2 minutes to complete, then the HFL response is, The system has been cleared. Returning to the main menu.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

To clear the system, do this:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Clearing the System

F eatures

379 2009 RL

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Change language. The HFL response is English or French?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Franais. The HFL response is Vous avez slectionn Franais. Les noms enregistrs en mode Anglais ne seront pas accessible en mode Franais. Voulez-vous continuer?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Oui. If there are no paired phones without French name tags, the HFL response is La langue a t change. Retour au menu principal.

If there are paired phones without French name tags, the HFL response is Pour que le systme identifie les tlphones qui ont t jumels dans une autre langue, les noms des tlphones doivent tre r-enregistrs.

If there are paired phones without French name tags, the following prompts will continue.

The HFL response is, for example, Quel est le nom Franais pour

Pauls phone ? Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Tlphone de Paul. The HFL response is, Quel est le nom Franais pour Pats phone ? Press and release the Talk button. Say Tlphone de Pat. After all paired phones missing a French name tag are re- recorded, the HFL will prompt, Retour au menu principal.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Changer Langue. The HFL response is, Anglais ou Franais?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say English. The HFL response is, You have selected English. Name tags that were stored while in French mode will not be accessible in English mode. Would you like to continue?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. If there are no paired phones without English name tags, the HFL response is The language has been changed. Returning to the main menu.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

To change from English to French, do this:

To change from French to English, do this:

Changing Language Canadian models only

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

380

NOTE:

2009 RL

If there are paired phones without English name tags, the following prompts will continue.

The HFL says, for example, What is the English name for

Tlphone de Paul ? Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Pauls phone. The HFL response is What is the English name for Tlphone de Pat ? Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Pats phone. After all paired phones missing an English name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will say Returning to the main menu.

When using voice control, the HFL call is placed on hold, or the HFL stops its voice recognition. To operate the HFL again, press the Talk button. Then after the beep, say the appropriate command.

In addition, you cannot use HFL while using AcuraLink.

If there are paired phones without English name tags, the HFL response is The language has been changed. For the system to identify phones that were paired while in another language, the phone names need to be re-recorded.

4.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

HFL Limitations

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink F

eatures

381

NOTE:

2009 RL

Since the rearview camera display area is limited, you should always back up slowly and carefully, and look behind you for obstacles.

Whenever you shift to reverse (R) with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, the rearview is shown on the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep the rearview camera clean, and do not cover the camera lens. To avoid scratching the lens when you clean it, use a moist, soft cloth.

Rearview Camera and Monitor

382

REAR VIEW CAMERA

2009 RL

Before you begin driving your vehicle, you should know what gasoline to use and how to check the levels of important fluids. You also need to know how to properly store luggage or packages. The information in this section will help you. If you plan to add any accessories to your vehicle, please read the information in this section first.

.............................Break-in Period . 384 .................Fuel Recommendation . 384

.........Service Station Procedures . 385 ....................................Refueling . 385

.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 387 Opening and Closing

................................the Hood . 387 ...................................Oil Check . 389

.............Engine Coolant Check . 389 ...............................Fuel Economy . 390

...Accessories and Modifications . 393 .............................Carrying Cargo . 395

Before Driving B

efore D

riving

383 2009 RL

Help assure your vehicles future reliability and performance by paying extra attention to how you drive during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid acceleration.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until the scheduled maintenance time.

You should also follow these recommendations with an overhauled or exchanged engine, or when the brakes are replaced.

Do not tow a trailer.

We recommend quality gasolines containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits.

In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend, in areas where it is available, the use of gasoline that does NOT contain manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT. Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact your authorized dealer for service.

Your vehicle is designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 91 or higher. If this octane grade is unavailable, regular unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 87 or higher may be used temporarily. The use of regular unleaded gasoline can cause metallic knocking noises in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance. The long-term use of regular-grade gasoline can lead to engine damage.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

384 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Park with the drivers side closest to the service station pump.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by volume and up to 15% MTBE by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-related information, please refer to your

. Open the fuel fill door by pressing the button in the drivers door (to open the fuel fill door manually, see page ).

1.

2.

509

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

B efore

D riving

385

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

TETHER

FUEL FILL CAP

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away. Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

2009 RL

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. You may hear a hissing sound as pressure inside the tank escapes. Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off. Do not try to top off the tank. This leaves some room in the fuel tank for the fuel to expand with temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full, there may be a problem with your vehicles fuel vapor recovery system. The system helps keep fuel vapor from going into the atmosphere. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult your dealer.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on until it clicks at least once. If you do not properly tighten the cap, you will see a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message on the multi- information display, and the malfunction indicator lamp may also come on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed until it latches.

3.

4.

5.

6.

507

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

386 2009 RL

Park the vehicle, and set the parking brake. Pull the hood release lever located under the lower left corner of the dashboard. The hood will pop up slightly.

Your vehicles on board diagnostic system will detect a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an evaporative system leak. The first time a leak is detected a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message appears on the multi-information display. Turn the engine off, and confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen it, then retighten it until it clicks at least once. The message should go off after several days of normal driving once you tighten or

replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another message, press the INFO button. The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message will appear each time you restart the engine until the system turns the message off.

If the system still detects a leak in the vehicles evaporative emissions system, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill cap was not already tightened, turn the engine off, and check or retighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once. The MIL should go off after several days of normal driving once the cap is tightened or replaced. If the MIL does not go off, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. For more information, see page .

1.

507

CONTINUED

Opening and Closing the HoodTighten Fuel Cap Message

Service Station Procedures B

efore D

riving

387

HOOD RELEASE LEVER

2009 RL

Lift the hood up most of the way. The hydraulic supports will lift it up the rest of the way and hold it up.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the handle, the mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Reach between the hood and the front bumper with your finger. Slide the latch handle up.

To close the hood, lower the hood to about a foot (30 cm) above the fender, then firmly press down on the front edge of the hood. Make sure it is securely latched.

3.2.

Service Station Procedures

388

LATCH

2009 RL

Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.

If it is near or below the lower mark, see on page .

Wait a few minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way back into its hole.

Look at the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is below the MIN line, see

on page .

Refer to on page for information

about checking other items on your vehicle.

4.

1.

2.

3. 458

461

452

Engine Coolant Check

Adding Engine Oil

Oil Check

Adding Engine Coolant

Owners Maintenance Checks

Service Station Procedures B

efore D

riving

389

MAX

MIN

LOWER MARK

UPPER MARK

DIPSTICK RESERVE TANK

2009 RL

Fuel economy is not a fixed number. It varies based on driving conditions, driving habits and vehicle condition. Therefore, it is not possible for one set of estimates to predict fuel economy precisely for all drivers in all environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuel cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000 km) per year multiplied by the cost per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost data) divided by the combined fuel economy.

For more information on fuel economy ratings and factors that affect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit )

Represents urban driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A range of miles per gallon achieved is also provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimates shown in the example to the right are a useful tool for comparison when buying a vehicle. EPA estimates include:

Represents a combination of city and highway driving. The scale represents the range of combined fuel economy for other vehicles in the class.

Represents a mixture of rural and interstate driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, typical of longer trips in free-flowing traffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

www. fueleconomy.gov www. vehicles.gc.ca

Fuel Economy

Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel Economy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPG Combined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

390

Combined Fuel Economy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

2009 RL

Aggressive driving (hard acceleration and braking) Excessive idling, accelerating and braking in stop-and-go traffic Cold engine operation (engines are more efficient when warmed up) Driving with a heavy load or the air conditioner running Improperly inflated tires

An underinflated tire increases rolling resistance, which reduces fuel economy.

It puts a heavier load on the engine, increasing fuel consumption.

In particular, a build-up of snow or mud on your vehicles underside adds weight and rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning helps your fuel economy.

The following factors can lower your vehicles fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehicle maximizes fuel economy. Poor maintenance can significantly reduce fuel economy. Always maintain your vehicle according to the maintenance messages displayed on the multi- information display (see

on page ). For example:

Idling results in 0 miles per gallon.

If your vehicle has a manual transmission, you can boost your fuel economy by up shifting as early as possible.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effect on fuel mileage at speeds above 45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your speed and you reduce the drag. Trailers, car top carriers, roof racks and bike racks are also big contributors to increased drag.

Rapid acceleration, abrupt cornering, and hard braking increase fuel consumption.

452 CONTINUED

Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity motor oil, displaying the API Certif ication Seal (see page

). Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight in your vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

Improving Fuel Economy

Owners Maintenance Checks

Avoid excessive idling

Always drive in the highest gear possible

Observe the speed limit

Drive moderately

458

Drive Efficiently

Vehicle Maintenance

B efore

D riving

391 2009 RL

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off. Reset trip counter to zero. Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill. Follow one of the simple calculations above.

Direct calculation is the recommended source of information about your actual fuel economy. Using frequency of fill-ups or taking fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate measures of fuel economy. Fuel economy may improve over the first several thousand miles.

The A/C puts an extra load on the engine which makes it use more fuel. Use the fresh-air ventilation when possible.

Combine several short trips into one. A warmed-up engine is more fuel efficient than a cold one.

1) 2) 3) 4)

Fuel Economy

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Calculating Fuel Economy

Minimize the use of the air conditioning system

Plan and combine trips

392

Miles driven

Gallons of fuel

Miles per Gallon

100 Kilometers L per

100 km Liter

2009 RL

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does not obscure any lights, or interfere with proper vehicle operation or performance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installing some non-Acura accessories, can make your vehicle unsafe. Before you make any modifications or add any accessories, be sure to read the following information.

Your dealer has Acura accessories that allow you to personalize your vehicle. These accessories have been designed and approved for your vehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact your dealer. If possible, have your dealer inspect the final installation.

Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits (see page ) or interfere with the proper operation of your vehicle.

Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the rear windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Although non-Acura accessories may fit on your vehicle, they may not meet factory specifications, and could adversely affect your vehicles handling and stability.

When properly installed, cellular phones, alarms, two-way radios, and low-powered audio systems should not interfere with your vehicles computer controlled systems, such as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and tire pressure monitoring system.

510

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications B

efore D

riving

393

Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicles handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding accessories and modifications.

2009 RL

Larger or smaller wheels and tires can interfere with the operation of your vehicles anti-lock brakes and other systems.

Modifying your steering wheel or any other part of your vehicles safety systems could make the systems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle, consult your dealer.

Raising your vehicle with a non- Acura suspension kit can affect the handling and stability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non- Acura suspension kit that significantly reduces ground clearance can allow the undercarriage to hit speed bumps or other raised objects, which could cause the airbags to deploy.

Removing parts from your vehicle, or replacing components with non- Acura components could seriously affect your vehicles handling, stability, and reliability.

Here are some examples:

Non-Acura wheels, because they are a universal design, can cause excessive stress on suspension components and will not be compatible with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

394 2009 RL

Your vehicle has several convenient storage areas:

Glove box Front door and seat-back pockets Console compartment

In addition, the trunk pass-through allows you to carry longer items.

However, carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicles handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. Before carrying any type of cargo, be sure to read the following pages.

Trunk Center pocket

Carrying Cargo B

efore D

riving

395

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS GLOVE BOX

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET CENTER POCKET

2009 RL

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).

See Tire And Loading Information label attached to the drivers doorjamb.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(6)

(5)

(4)

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

396

Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

2009 RL

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Carrying Cargo B

efore D

riving

397

Max Load (850 lbs) Cargo Weight (550 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Cargo Weight (250 lbs)

Cargo Weight (100 lbs)

Passenger Weight (150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)

Passenger Weight (150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)

Passenger Weight (150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)

2009 RL

Store or secure all items that could be thrown around and hurt someone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of the rear shelf. They can block your view and be thrown around the vehicle during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats and interfere with the pedals or seat operation.

Keep the glove box closed while driving. If it is open, a passenger could injure their knees during a crash or sudden stop.

Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.

If you carry large items that prevent you from closing the trunk lid, exhaust gas can enter the passenger area. To avoid the possibility of

, follow the instructions on page .

If you carry any items extending through the trunk pass-through, tie down or secure all items that could be thrown around the vehicle and hurt someone during a crash or sudden stop.

If you carry any items on a roof rack, be sure the total weight of the rack and the items does not exceed 121 lbs (55 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack, the roof rack weight limit may be lower. Refer to the information that came with your roof rack.

56

carbon monoxide poisoning

Carrying Items in the Passenger Compartment

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on a Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

398 2009 RL

The cargo floor hooks can also be used to tie down and secure items on the floor.

There are hooks on the floor and both sides of the trunk. They can be used to install the cargo net for securing items. The side cargo hooks are designed to hold light items (maximum load: 6 lbs or 3 kgs for each hook). Heavy objects may damage the side hooks.

Cargo Hooks

Carrying Cargo B

efore D

riving

399

SIDE CARGO HOOKS CARGO FLOOR HOOKS

2009 RL

400 2009 RL

This section gives you tips on starting the engine under various conditions, and how to operate the automatic transmission. It also includes important information on parking your vehicle, the braking system, the Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) system, the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system, the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS), the collision mitigation brake system (CMBS), and facts you need if you are planning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 402 .......................Starting the Engine . 403

Check Starting System .................................Message . 404

..............Automatic Transmission . 405 Driving with the Paddle

...................................Shifters . 409 ................D-Paddle Shift Mode . 409 ..............Sequential Shift Mode . 411

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive .................(SH-AWD ) System . 413

...........................................Parking . 415 .............................Braking System . 416

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 417 Collision Mitigation Brake

........................System (CMBS) . 419 Tire Pressure Monitoring

........................System (TPMS) . 429 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),

aka Electronic Stability ........Control (ESC), System . 435

...........................Towing a Trailer . 437 ...................Towing Your Vehicle . 442

Driving D

riving

401

TM

TM

2009 RL

Make sure all windows, mirrors, and outside lights are clean and unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that any items you may be carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (see page ).

Check the steering wheel adjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors and the trunk are securely closed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seat belts (see page ).

You should do the following checks and adjustments before you drive your vehicle.

When you start the engine, check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel, and the messages on the multi-information display (see pages , and

).

Visually check the tires. If a tire looks low, use a gauge to check its pressure (see page ).

Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

17

78 61 70

156

148

161

481

Preparing to Drive

402 2009 RL

If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, or starts but stalls right away, repeat step 4 with the accelerator pedal pressed halfway down. If the engine starts, release pressure on the accelerator pedal so the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, press the accelerator pedal all the way down, and hold it there while starting to clear flooding. If the engine still does not start, return to step 5.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is in Park. Press on the brake pedal.

Your vehicles starting system has an auto control mode. When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, this feature keeps the engines starter motor running until the engine starts. Follow these instructions to start the engine:

Without touching the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, then release the ignition switch. You do not need to hold the ignition switch in the START (III) position to start the engine. Depending on the outside temperature, the starter motor runs for about 6 to 9

seconds until the engine starts.

If you hold the ignition switch in the START (III) position for more than 7 seconds, the starter motor, depending on the outside temperature, runs for about 10 to 25 seconds until the engine starts.

If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds before trying again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Starting the Engine D

riving

403

The engine is harder to start in cold weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engines f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page .151

2009 RL

If there is a problem with the starting system, you will see a CHECK STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. You will also see this message when the auto control mode of the starting system has a problem.

If this message is on, the ignition switch has to be held in the START (III) position manually until the engine starts. The ignition switch can be held in that position up to 15 seconds.

Even though you may be able to start the engine manually without the auto control mode of the starting system, have your dealer inspect your vehicle.

Starting the Engine

Check Starting System Message

404 2009 RL

The D indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it flashes while driving (in any shift position), it indicates a possible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on along with the D indicator, there is a problem with the automatic transmission control system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and have the transmission checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

When the D indicator warns of a possible problem with the transmission, you will see a CHECK TRANSMISSION message on the multi-information display (see page

).

These indicators between the tachometer and speedometer show which position the shift lever is in.

To shift from Park to any position, press firmly on the brake pedal, and press the release button on the top of the shift lever, then move the lever. You cannot shift out of Park when the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I) position.

79

CONTINUED

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission D

riving

405 2009 RL

Use neutral if you need to restart a stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop briefly with the engine idling. Shift to the Park position if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason. Press on the brake pedal when you are moving the shift lever from neutral to another gear.

Press the brake pedal and press the release button to shift from Park to reverse. To shift from reverse to neutral, come to a complete stop and then shift. Press the release button before shifting into reverse from neutral.

To avoid transmission damage, come to a complete stop before shifting into Park. You must also press the release button to shift into Park. The shift lever must be in Park before you can turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, or remove the built-in key from the ignition switch.

If you have done all of the above and still cannot move the lever out of Park, see on page .

This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use Park whenever you are turning off or starting the engine. To shift out of Park, you must press on the brake pedal and have your foot off the accelerator pedal. Press the release button on the top of the shift lever to move it.

Use this position for your normal driving. The transmis- sion automatically adjusts to keep the engine at the best speed for the driving conditions.

407

Do this: Press the brake pedal, and press the shift lever release button. Press the shift lever release button.

Move the shift lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to P N to R D to S S to D D to N N to D R to N

Automatic Transmission

Neutral (N)

Reverse (R)

Shift Lock Release

Park (P)

Drive (D)

406 2009 RL

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometers red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engines computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone.

Make sure the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) position.

Set the parking brake.

This allows you to move the shift lever out of Park if the normal method of pushing on the brake pedal does not work.

To shift into the S position, press the release button on the front of the shift lever, and move the lever to S. This position is similar to D, except only gears from first to fourth are selected. The S position keeps the transmission from cycling between fourth and fifth gears in stop-and-go driving.

With the shift lever in D or S, you can also use the paddle shifters to shift the transmission up or down. Once you begin to use the paddle shifters in S, the transmission will no longer upshift or downshift automatically. For more information of driving with the paddle shifters, see page .

1.

2.

409

CONTINUED

Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock ReleaseS Position (S)

Automatic Transmission D

riving

407 2009 RL

If you need to use the shift lock release, it means your vehicle is developing a problem. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shift lock release slot cover next to the shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a metal fingernail file to remove the cover. Carefully pry on the edge of the cover.

Push down on the built-in key while you press the release button and move the shift lever out of Park to neutral.

Remove the built-in key from the shift lock release slot, then reinstall the cover. Make sure the notch on the cover is on the drivers side. Press the brake pedal, and restart the engine.

Insert the built-in key into the shift lock release slot.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission

408

COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

2009 RL

Each time you pull (right), the transmission shifts to a higher gear. Pull (left) to downshift. You will see the selected gear number on the instrument panel.

To shift up or down, use the (right) or (left) paddle shifter on each side of the steering wheel.

When you are driving in D position, pulling either paddle shifter switches from the ordinary automatic transmission [drive mode (D)] to the D-paddle shift mode. You can shift the transmission up or down manually with the paddle shifters.

Downshifting gives you more power when climbing, and provides engine braking when going down a steep hill.

When you pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator shows you the selected gear number.

CONTINUED

Using the Paddle Shifters in D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters D

riving

409

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

PADDLE SHIFTERS

2009 RL

The transmission control system monitors the accelerator pedal use and your driving conditions. When you press the accelerator pedal as in normal driving, the system judges that you are driving at a constant cruising speed without using the paddle shifters. Under these conditions, D-paddle shift mode is canceled, and the transmission automatically returns to drive mode (D).

If there is a problem in the transmission while you are driving with the paddle shifters, the D indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift mode is canceled, and the transmission returns to drive mode (D).

Each time you pull either paddle shifter, the transmission shifts one gear up or down. If you want to shift up or down more than two gears, pull the paddle shifter twice, pause, and then pull it again.

The transmission remains in the selected gear if you do not accelerate.

When the transmission returns to drive mode (D), the displayed gear number disappears.

The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if:

You downshift before the engine speed falls below the upper limit of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.

The transmission downshifts to first gear and returns to drive mode (D) when the vehicle comes to a complete stop and the vehicle speed is about 9 mph (15 km/h).

You upshift before the engine speed rises above the lower limit of the higher gear.

You pull both paddle shifters at the same time.

You pull one of the two paddle shifters with another paddle shifter being pressed.

Driving with the Paddle Shifters

410 2009 RL

When you move the shift lever from D to S position and pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator displays M along with the selected gear number.

To upshift, pull the (right) paddle shifter. To downshift, pull the (left) paddle shifter.

When you accelerate from a stop, the transmission starts in first gear, and you must manually upshift between first and fifth gears. Make sure you upshift before the engine speed reaches the tachometers red zone.

The transmission remains in the selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There is no automatic downshift when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor.

When you are driving in 4th or 5th gear, the transmission downshifts to the lower gear under the following conditions:

The vehicle slows down to a certain speed.

You press the brake pedal.

With the shift lever in S position, you can select the sequential shift mode to shift gears; much like a manual transmission using the paddle shifters, but without a clutch pedal.

To enter the sequential shift mode, press the release button on the front of the shift lever, move the lever to the S position, then pull either paddle shifter. To cancel the sequential shift mode and return to the ordinary automatic transmission, move the shift lever from the S position. When moving the shift lever, be careful not to operate incorrectly. While you are driving in the sequential shift mode, the transmission will not automatically return to ordinary automatic transmission.

CONTINUED

Using the Paddle Shifters in S position (Sequential Shift Mode)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters D

riving

411

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

M INDICATOR

2009 RL

Downshifting with the paddle shifter allows you to increase the engine braking when going down steep or long hills, and provides more power when climbing uphills. You can upshift the transmission manually to reduce the rpm. Driving in the higher gear helps fuel economy.

To Shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

Here are the speed ranges for upshifting and downshifting.

The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if:

You downshift before the engine speed falls below the upper limit of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.

Also, you cannot upshift with the paddle shifter before the engine speed reaches the lower limit of the higher gear.

You try to shift to third or a higher gear when the vehicle is stationary.

You pull one of the two paddle shifters with another paddle shifter being pressed.

You pull both paddle shifters at the same time.

Speed range

over 0 mph (0 km/h)

over 9 mph (15 km/h)

over 17 mph (27 km/h)

over 38 mph (60 km/h)

Speed range

under 131 mph (210 km/h)

under 94 mph (150 km/h)

under 63 mph (100 km/h)

under 31 mph (50 km/h)

The transmission also shifts automatically as the vehicle comes to a complete stop. It downshifts to first gear when the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.

To Shift from

5 4

4 3

3 2

2 1

Driving with the Paddle Shifters

412 2009 RL

CONTINUED

The SH-AWD torque distribution monitor on the multi-information display shows you the amount of torque being sent to the wheels. Each wheel right front (RF), left front (LF), right rear (RR), and left rear (LR) has its own torque indicator.

The super handling-all wheel drive (SH-AWD) system is a full time all- wheel-drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amounts of engine torque to all wheels independently, according to the driving conditions.

While the SH-AWD system helps to enhance the vehicles driving stability in all situations, it is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When you are in sequential shift mode, and the vehicle is stopped, pull the (right) paddle shifter to shift to second gear. You will see M2 in the display. Starting in second gear helps to reduce wheelspin in deep snow or on a slippery surface.

SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor

Starting in Second Gear

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) System D

riving

413

TORQUE INDICATOR

TORQUE INDICATOR

TM

2009 RL

Each torque indicator is displayed as a bar graph divided into 5 segments. The number of segments represents the amount of torque distributed to each wheel.

When there is only a slight change in torque distribution while driving, such as cruising on level roads at the same speed, the torque distribution monitor may stop displaying the amount of torque. This is not a system problem. The monitor will show the amount if the system senses any change in torque distribution.

If the SH-AWD indicator blinks while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is too high. You will also see an SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. HIGH message on the multi- information display. If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to Park, and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out. If the indicator does not go out, take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.

If the SH-AWD indicator on the instrument panel stays on, and the CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM message also appears on the multi- information display, there is problem with the SH-AWD system.

Your vehicle still has normal front- wheel drive with vehicle stability assist (VSA), but does not have the advantages of SH-AWD. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) System

414

TM

2009 RL

Check the indicator on the instrument panel to verify that the security system is set.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels toward the curb.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb.

Never park over dry leaves, tall grass, or other flammable materials. The hot three way catalytic converter could cause these materials to catch on fire.

Make sure the parking brake is fully released before driving away. Driving with the parking brake partially set can overheat or damage the rear brakes.

Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly or your vehicle may roll if it is on an incline.

Set the parking brake before you put the transmission in Park. This keeps the vehicle from moving and putting pressure on the parking mechanism in the transmission.

Make sure the moonroof and the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc., in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

Parking Tips

Parking D

riving

415 2009 RL

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake pedal assist function increases the force you apply to the brake pedal during an emergency stop. When the brake pedal assist is activated, the e- pretensioners (if equipped) tighten front seat belts (see page ). The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard (see page ).

Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes applied lightly, builds up heat, reduces their effectiveness and reduces brake pad life. In addition, fuel economy can be reduced. It also keeps your brake lights on all the time, confusing drivers behind you.

The hydraulic system that operates the brakes has two separate circuits. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle (the left-front brake is connected with the right-rear brake, etc.). If one circuit should develop a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels.

Constant application of the brakes when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effective- ness. Use the engine to assist the brakes by taking your foot off the accelerator and downshifting to a lower gear.

Check the brakes after driving through deep water. Apply the brakes moderately to see if they feel normal. If not, apply them gently and frequently until they do. Be extra cautious in your driving.

If the brake pads need replacing, you will hear a distinctive, metallic screeching sound when you apply the brake pedal. If you do not have the brake pads replaced, they will screech all the time. It is normal for the brakes to occasionally squeal or squeak when you apply them.

24

417

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System

416 2009 RL

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than a person can do it.

If this indicator comes on, the anti- lock function of the braking system has shut down. The brakes still work like a conventional system, but without anti-lock. You should have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible.

You will feel a pulsation in the brake pedal when the ABS activates, and you may hear some noise. This is normal: it is the ABS rapidly pumping the brakes. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

When the ABS indicator comes on, you will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display.You should never pump the brake pedal.

CONTINUED

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) D

riving

417 2009 RL

on loose or uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow, than a vehicle without anti- lock.

It only helps with steering control during braking.

such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions.

Always steer moderately when you are braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.

If the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on together, and the parking brake is fully released, the EBD system may also be shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed on page . If the brakes feel normal, drive slowly and have your vehicle repaired by your dealer as soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard braking which could cause the rear wheels to lock up and possibly lead to a loss of control.

The VSA indicator will come on along with the ABS indicator.

508

A vehicle with ABS may require a longer distance to stop

Important Safety Reminders ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid that results from changing direction abruptly,

ABS cannot prevent the loss of stability.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

418 2009 RL

The CMBS does not activate if the speed difference between the two vehicles is less than 10 mph (15 km/h). CMBS may also not activate if you turn the steering wheel to avoid the collision.

When the CMBS activates, the brake lights also come on.

The collision mitigation brake system (CMBS) can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle hitting the vehicle in front of you. It is designed to reduce the speed of your vehicle before an unavoidable collision occurs and, if possible, to alert you to a potential collision while there is time to prevent it. Here is a brief description of what the CMBS can do:

When your speed is above 10 mph (15 km/h), the CMBS radar sensor in the front grille can sense a vehicle ahead of you. When your vehicle gets too close to the vehicle ahead of you, the system may activate a warning beep, causing automatic application of the brakes, and causing the e-pretensioners to tighten the front seat belts (see page ).

The CMBS consists of a radar sensor in the front grille, a brake actuator in the engine compartment, an indicator on the instrument panel, seat belt e-pretensioners on the front seats, and an on/off switch on the dashboard.

24

If equipped Overview

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS) D

riving

419

RADAR SENSOR

BRAKE ACTUATOR

SEAT BELT e-PRETENSIONERS

2009 RL

The radar sensor is located under the Acura emblem in the front grille. If the radar sensor cover is covered with mud, dirt, dead leaves, wet snow, etc., or if you put a sticker on it, the CMBS will automatically shut off, and the CMBS indicator on the instrument panel will come on. You will also see a CHECK CMBS RADAR SENSOR message on the multi-information display for about 5 seconds.

Always keep the radar sensor cover clean. If it gets dirty, clean it with water or a mild detergent. Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder.

Do not allow anything to impact the radar sensor or the radar sensor cover. If either of these parts receives a strong impact, turn off the system by pressing the CMBS off switch, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the front grille ever needs to be repaired, consult a dealer first.

If the radar sensor cover or the radar sensor ever needs to be removed, take your vehicle to a dealer.

There are three bolts on the sides of the radar sensor. Do not tamper with these bolts, or you may cause the system to malfunction.

Radar Sensor

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

420

RADAR SENSOR COVER

BOLTS (Do not tamper)

2009 RL

The radar sensor may not always scan as intended. Here are two examples:

The tires are not correctly maintained. Always make sure the tire pressures are correct (see page ), and that the tires are the correct size and in good condition (see Tires on page ).

Your vehicle is tilted because of a heavy load in the rear or from modifications to the suspension. Do not overload your vehicle (see Carrying Cargo on page ), and do not make any modifications to the suspension (see Accessories and Modifications on page ).

395

393

480

480

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS) D

riving

421

When the CMBS is on, the radar sensor constantly scans f or vehicles ahead of you. This means that driving on a road with a f ew or no vehicles could cause a CHECK CMBS RADAR SENSOR message to appear on the multi- inf ormation display. This is normal and not a cause f or concern.

2009 RL

If the system senses a likely collision with a vehicle or object ahead of you, it alerts you with an audible and a visual alarm.

The audible alarm is a constant beeping sound; the visual alert is an amber colored BRAKE message that flashes on the multi-information display. If these alarms come on, take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.).

To turn the CMBS off, press the CMBS OFF switch on the dashboard for about 1 second. When you do this, a beeper sounds, a CMBS indicator on the instrument panel comes on, and a CMBS OFF message appears on the multi-information display. To turn the system back on, press the switch again for about 1 second.

Collision Alarm CMBS OFF Switch

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

422

CMBS OFF SWITCH

2009 RL

The CMBS will automatically recover when these conditions are improved.

Any of the conditions below can cause the CMBS to shut off. When the system shuts off, the CMBS indicator in the instrument panel comes on, and a CHECK CMBS SYSTEM message appears on the multi-information display for about 5 seconds.

An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).

Extended off-road or mountainous driving.

Driving your vehicle with the parking brake applied.

Driving your vehicle in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

A dirty emblem on the front grille.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the CMBS is turned on if it was on previously.

Automatic Shut Off

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS) D

riving

423 2009 RL

The CMBS indicator normally comes on under these conditions:

When you manually turn off the system.

When the system shuts off automatically.

When you drive in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.).

When the VSA system indicator comes on (see page ).

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the CMBS indicator should come on for a few seconds, then go off. If the indicator comes on at any other time and a CHECK CMBS SYSTEM message appears on the multi-information display, there is a problem with the CMBS. You can still drive your vehicle, but CMBS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If anything covers the front grille (dirt, mud, dry leaves, wet snow, etc.).This indicator comes on for several

seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It also comes on and stays on when you turn the CMBS off by pressing the CMBS OFF switch.

To turn the CMBS back on, make sure the vehicle is stopped and the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, then press the CMBS OFF switch for about 1 second.

435 CMBS Indicator

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

424

CMBS INDICATOR

2009 RL

A vehicle cuts in front of you and brakes suddenly.

When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high speed.

Driving in heavy, stop-and-go traffic.

The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.

Immediately after you drive off.

The CMBS may not activate under some conditions. Here are a few examples:

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.

A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed.

CONTINUED

Limitations

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS) D

riving

425

YOUR VEHICLEYOUR VEHICLE

2009 RL

Even with little or no chance of a collision, the CMBS may activate under these conditions:

A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.

When you approach or pass a vehicle ahead of you that is turning left or right in an intersection.

When you change lanes quickly, then overtake the vehicle ahead of you.

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

426

YOUR VEHICLEYOUR VEHICLE

The CMBS is not designed to detect pedestrians.

2009 RL

When you pass a low bridge at high speed.

When you approach train tracks at the bottom of a hill and you do not apply the brakes.

Because of the road condition (curved, winding, etc.) or the state of your vehicle (turning angle, lane position, etc.), CMBS can sometimes mistake a stationary object (light pole, traffic sign, etc.) as a vehicle ahead of you and temporarily operate. This is normal.

When you go over a sharp-edged speed bump at high speed.

When you go over areas of construction on the road surface.

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS) D

riving

427

LOW BRIDGE

RAILS

YOUR VEHICLE

SIGN, POLE, etc.

2009 RL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The main purpose of the CMBS is to reduce the severity of injuries caused by an unavoidable collision. While the CMBS may help to alert you and minimize the severity of a collision, it may not activate in every dangerous situation.

Even with the CMBS, it is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately, according to the driving conditions.

Important Safety Reminder

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

428 2009 RL

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that turns on every time you start the engine and monitors the pressure in your tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressure sensor. If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator in the instrumental panel and the appropriate tire position indicator on the tire pressure monitor on the multi-information display (see page

) to come on. Refer to page for tire inflation guidelines.

If there is a problem with the TPMS, this indicator begins to flash. It stops flashing after approximately 1 minute, then stays on. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).

When the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator is on, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. The multi-information display also shows a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message (see page ). You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicles tire information placard.

Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies by temperature and other conditions, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on unexpectedly.

For example, if you check and fill your tires in a warm area, then drive in extremely cold weather, the tire pressure will be lower than measured and could be underinflated and cause the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if you check and adjust your tire pressure in cooler conditions, and drive into extremely hot conditions, the tire may become overinflated. However, the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator will not come on if the tires are overinflated.

431

431

480

433 CONTINUED

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

riving

429 2009 RL

Although your tire pressure is monitored, you must manually check the tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when the vehicle is cold, and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified on the vehicle placard and in the owners manual (see page

).

If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressure is too low to continue driving, replace the tire with the compact spare tire (see page ).

If you think you can safely drive a short distance to a service station, proceed slowly to the station, then inflate the tire to the recommended pressure.

If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS and tire monitor indicators will come on. Replace the indicated flat tire with the compact spare tire (see page ).

After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator stays on while driving. After several miles (kilometers) driving, this indicator begins to flash, then stays on again. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display. This is normal; the system cannot monitor the spare tire pressure. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure it is correct.

This indicator and the warning message on the multi-information display will go off, after several miles (kilometers) driving, when the spare tire is replaced with the specified

regular tire equipped with the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agent in a flat tire. If used, you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor. Have the flat tire repaired by your dealer as soon as possible.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by your dealer or a qualified technician.

480

494

495

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

430 2009 RL

If any of the tires have low pressure, the multi-information display will show a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message. You will also see one or more low pressure tire positions blinking in the display (see page

).

If there is a system error with the TPMS, the multi-information display shows a SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR message (see page ), and the tire pressure readings will not be displayed. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).

When all tire pressures are normal, the multi-information display will show TIRE PRESSURE OK SYSTEM FUNCTION NORMAL.

When any of the tires has low pressure, the multi-information display shows a TIRE PRESSURE ERROR SYSTEM FUNCTION NORMAL message (see page ).76

79

79

433

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitor

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

riving

431

VEHICLE ICON

2009 RL

When cruise control is on while driving, the pressure reading cannot be checked by the tire pressure monitor on the multi-information display.

When the TPMS is functioning normally, you can see the tire pressure readings of each tire in psi (U.S. models) or kPa (Canadian models) by pressing the SEL/ RESET button while the multi- information display shows the tire pressure monitor.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the low tire position on the low tire pressure monitor do not go out after inflating the tires to the specified values, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible.

If one or more tires have low pressure, the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator on the instrument panel also comes on (see page ).429

Tire Pressure Readings

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

432

CANADAU.S.

2009 RL

If there is a problem with the TPMS, the multi-information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message.

If you see this message, the tire pressure monitor shows a SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR message. The system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. Also, the tire pressure readings will not be displayed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator begins to flash (see page

).

It is possible that the pressures shown on the multi-information display and the pressures you manually measure are slightly different.

If the difference is significant or you cannot make the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator and message on the multi-information display go out after inflating the tires to the specified values, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible.

67

CONTINUED

Check TPMS System Message

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

riving

433 2009 RL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on, or the multi- information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message, the VSA system automatically turns on even when the VSA system is turned off by pressing the VSA OFF switch (see page ). If this happens, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

When you restart the vehicle with the compact spare tire, the TPMS system message will also be displayed on the multi-information display after several miles (kilometers) driving.

436

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

434 2009 RL

The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than desired. It also assists you in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. It does this by regulating the engines output and by selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you will see the VSA activation indicator blink (see page ).

If this indicator comes on while driving, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. If the VSA system indicator stays on or comes back on while driving, have the VSA system inspected by your dealer.

When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator in the same way it does at other times. There may also be some noise from the VSA hydraulic system. You will also see the VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance the vehicles driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicles entire braking system. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

If the indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position, there may be a problem with the VSA system. Have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible (see page ).

When the VSA system indicator comes on, you will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.

Without VSA, your vehicle still has normal braking and cornering ability, but it does not have VSA traction and stability enhancement.

The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

65 65

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D

riving

435

NOTE:

2009 RL

If you install winter tires, make sure they are the same size as those that were originally supplied with your vehicle. Exercise the same caution during winter driving as you would if your vehicle was not equipped with VSA.

Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSA to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are of the same size and type as your original tires (see page ).

VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

When VSA is off, the VSA activation indicator comes on as a reminder. Press and hold the switch again. It turns the system back on.

This switch is at the right side of the left vent. Press and hold it until you hear a beep.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA and traction control systems switched off.

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off. When the VSA system is off, the traction control system is also off. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on (see page ), or the multi-information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message with the indicator flashing (see page ), the VSA system automatically turns on even if the VSA system is turned off with the VSA OFF switch. In this case, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

429

433

485

VSA and Tire Sizes

VSA OFF Switch

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

436

VSA OFF SWITCH

2009 RL

Your vehicle has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo. You can also use it to tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the guidelines in this section.

The weight that the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts on the hitch should be approximately 10 percent of the trailer weight. Too much tongue load reduces front-tire traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.

The maximum allowable weight of the trailer and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing a load that is too heavy can seriously affect your vehicles handling and performance. It can also damage the engine and drivetrain.

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Tongue Load:Total Trailer Weight:

Towing a Trailer D

riving

437

Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.

2009 RL

To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40% toward the rear, then re-adjust the load as needed.

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load is: 4,980 lbs (2,260 kg)

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axles are: 2,680 lbs (1,215 kg) on the front axle, and 2,380 lbs (1,080 kg) on the rear axle.

Towing generally requires a variety of supplemental equipment, depending on the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing, and where you tow. To ensure the best quality, we recommend that you purchase Acura equipment whenever possible.

Discuss your needs with your trailer sales or rental agency, and follow the guidelines in the rest of this section. Also make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province, and local regulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle must be properly bolted to the underbody.

The best way to confirm that all loads are within limits is to check them at a public scale. For public scales in your area, check your local phone book, or contact your trailer dealer or rental agency for assistance.

If you cannot get to a public scale, you can estimate the total trailer weight by adding the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer) with everything in or on the trailer.

If you normally pull the same load each time you tow a trailer, you can use a suitable scale or a special tongue load gauge to check the tongue load the first time you set up a towing combination (a fully loaded vehicle and trailer), then recheck the tongue load whenever the conditions change.

Checking Loads Towing Equipment and Accessories

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

Hitches

Towing a Trailer

438 2009 RL

Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Make sure the chains are secured to the trailer and hitch, and that they cross under the tongue and can catch the trailer if it becomes unhitched. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not let the chains drag on the ground.

If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to tap into your vehicles hydraulic system. No matter how successful it may seem, any attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicles hydraulic system will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rental agency for more information on installing electric brakes.

Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state/province, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agencies for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow, and use only equipment designed for your vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type and brand, you should have a qualified technician install a suitable connector between the vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or installation can cause damage to your vehicles electrical system and affect your vehicle warranty.

There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet.

CONTINUED

Safety Chains Trailer LightsTrailer Brakes

Towing a Trailer D

riving

439 2009 RL

Many states and Canadian provinces require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if they dont, you should install special mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.

When preparing to tow, and before driving away, be sure to check the following:

Your vehicle tires and spare are properly inflated, and the trailer tires and spare are inflated as recommended by the trailer maker.

The vehicle has been properly serviced, and the suspension and the cooling system are in good operating condition.

The trailer has been properly serviced and is in good condition, and the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.

All weights and loads are within limits.

The hitch, safety chains, and any other attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer are properly secured and cannot shift while you drive.

Pre-Tow ChecklistAdditional Towing Equipment

Towing a Trailer

440 2009 RL

The added weight, length, and height of a trailer will affect your vehicles handling and performance, so driving with a trailer requires some special driving skills and techniques.

For your safety and the safety of others, take time to practice driving maneuvers before heading for the open road, and follow the guidelines below.

Make turns more slowly and wider than normal. The trailer tracks a smaller arc than your vehicle, and it can hit or run over something the vehicle misses. Allow more time and distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly as this could cause the trailer to jackknife or turn over.

Drive slower than normal in all driving situations, and obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers. Use the D position when towing a trailer on level roads. See

in the next column for additional gear information. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds, the trailer may sway or affect vehicle handling.

CONTINUED

Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing Speeds and Gears

Towing a Trailer D

riving

441 2009 RL

Crosswinds and air turbulence caused by passing trucks can disrupt your steering and cause the trailer to sway. When being passed by a large vehicle, keep a constant speed, and steer straight ahead. Do not try to make quick steering or braking corrections.

Follow all normal precautions when parking, including firmly setting the parking brake and putting the transmission in Park. Also, place wheel chocks at each of the trailers tires.

When climbing hills, closely watch your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn the air conditioning off, reduce speed and, if necessary, pull to the side of the road to let the engine cool.

Always drive slowly and have someone guide you when backing up. Grip the of the steering wheel; turn the wheel to the left to get the trailer to move to the left, and turn the wheel right to move the trailer to the right.

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, see page .

If you must stop when facing uphill, use the foot brake or parking brake. Do not try to hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator, as this can cause the automatic transmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduce your speed, and shift down to S position, or use the paddle shifters to the lower gear (3, 2 or 1) in the S position. When towing a trailer, do not ride the brakes, and remember, it will take longer to slow down and stop when towing a trailer.

519

bottom

Backing Up

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Parking

Driving on Hills Towing Your Vehicle

Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle

442 2009 RL

This section explains why it is important to keep your vehicle well maintained and how to follow basic maintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools to perform more complex maintenance tasks on your vehicle, you may want to purchase the service manual. See page for information on how to obtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includes instructions on how to read the maintenance minder messages on the multi-information display, and instructions for simple maintenance tasks you may want to take care of yourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 444 ....................Maintenance Minder . 445

..............................Fluid Locations . 455 ......Engine Compartment Covers . 456

........................Adding Engine Oil . 458 Changing the Engine Oil and

...........................................Filter . 459 ..............................Engine Coolant . 461

....................Windshield Washers . 464 ....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 464

....................................Brake Fluid . 466 ....................Power Steering Fluid . 466

....................................Timing Belt . 467 .............................................Lights . 468

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 476 ................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 476

.....................................Floor Mats . 477 .................................Wiper Blades . 478

...........................................Wheels . 480 ...............................................Tires . 480

...................Checking the Battery . 489 .............................Vehicle Storage . 492

541

Maintenance M

aintenance

443 2009 RL

To eliminate potential hazards, read the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools and skills required.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.

Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you operate the engine.

Let the engine and exhaust system cool down before touching any parts.

Do not run the engine unless instructed to do so.

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.

To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.

All service items not detailed in this section should be performed by a certified technician or other qualified mechanic.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle Hazards Carbon Monoxide poison from engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

444

Improperly maintaining this vehicle, or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations and schedules in this owners manual.

Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owners manual.

2009 RL

One of the most convenient and important features of the multi- information display on your vehicle is the maintenance minder.

Based on engine operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions, the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining engine oil life.

The system also displays the code for other scheduled maintenance items needing service.

To see the remaining engine oil life displayed on the lower right corner on the multi-information display as a percentage, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the engine oil life appears (see page ).

The remaining engine oil life is displayed according to the table shown below.

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)

100% 91% 90% 81% 80% 71% 70% 61% 60% 51% 50% 41% 40% 31% 30% 21% 20% 16% 15% 11% 10% 6% 5% 1%

0%

Displayed Engine Oil Life

(%) 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 15% 10% 5% 0%

73

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

M aintenance

445

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

2009 RL

The message will be canceled if the or button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or button to see the message again.

When the remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent, the multi-information display shows a SERVICE DUE SOON message along with the maintenance schedule code indicating the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change. Refer to page and for a complete list of the maintenance main items and sub items.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message OIL LIFE along with the percentage of oil life remaining and the maintenance item code(s), appear on the lower part of the multi- information display.453 454

Maintenance Minder

446

MESSAGE

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

2009 RL

The message will be canceled if the or button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or button to see the message again.

When the remaining engine oil life is 1 to 5 percent, the multi-information display shows a SERVICE DUE NOW message with the maintenance items. When you see this message have the indicated maintenance performed as soon as possible.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message SERVICE OIL LIFE, along with 5%, and the maintenance item code(s) are displayed on the lower part of the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is 1 to 5 percent (see page ).445

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder M

aintenance

447 2009 RL

Press and hold the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 10 seconds. The remaining engine oil life reset mode will be shown on the multi- information display.

To reset the engine oil life, press the or button on the steering wheel to select RESET on the display, and press the SEL/ RESET button.

To cancel resetting the oil life, press the or button on the steering wheel to select CANCEL on the display, and press the SEL/ RESET button.

If you do not complete the reset procedure within 30 seconds after selecting the reset mode, the mode will be canceled automatically.

Your dealer will reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see OIL LIFE 100% on the display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer, reset the maintenance minder as follows:

If the oil life minder is not displayed, press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly until it is.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

The maintenance item code or codes indicate the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

453

Maintenance Minder

448

U.S.

CANADA

2009 RL

Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the oil life minder as previously described.

The message will be canceled if the or button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or button to see the message again.

If the indicated maintenance service is not done and the remaining engine oil life reaches 0%, the multi- information display will show the message SERVICE PAST DUE and the maintenance item code(s). This message is displayed when the total mileage is less than 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after the engine oil life became 0%.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life minder. The message SERVICE OIL LIFE, along with 0%, and the maintenance item code are displayed on the lower part of the multi- information display when the calculated engine oil life is 0 percent.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder M

aintenance

449 2009 RL

Also, the percentage 0 keeps blinking on the display.

If the indicated required service is not done and the remaining engine oil life becomes 0%, the multi- information display will show a SERVICE PAST DUE message, the total mileage after the remaining oil life became 0%, and the maintenance item code(s).

This message is displayed when you drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after seeing the 0% message.

Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as previously described.

The message will be canceled if the or button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or button to see the message again.

This particular message is displayed when the mileage after the engine oil life became 0% reaches 10 miles (for U.S. models)/10 km (for Canadian models).

The maximum total mileage shown with this message is 9999 mile (for U.S. models) or 9999 km (for Canadian models).

Maintenance Minder

450

U.S.

CANADA

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

2009 RL

This particular message is displayed when you drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after seeing 0%.

When you press the SEL/RESET button to select the engine oil life minder, the message SERVICE, along with the maintenance item code and the total negative mileage after the oil life became 0 percent, will be displayed on the lower part of the multi-information display.

The maximum total negative mileage is 9999 mile (for U.S. models) or 9999 km (for Canadian models).

If you have the required service performed but do not reset the display, or reset the display without performing the service, the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because you will no longer have an accurate record of when maintenance is needed.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Important Maintenance Precautions

M aintenance

451

U.S.

CANADA

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

2009 RL

Engine oil level Check every time you fill the fuel tank. See page .

Engine coolant level Check the radiator reserve tank every time you fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Check the fluid level monthly. See page

.

Lights Check the operation of the headlights, parking lights, taillights, high-mount brake light, and license plate lights monthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid level monthly. See page .

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the items marked with will not void your emissions warranties. However, Acura recommends that all maintenance services be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the multi-information display.

You should check the following items at the specified intervals. If you are unsure of how to perform any check, turn to the appropriate page listed.

We recommend using Acura parts and fluids whenever you have maintenance done. These are manufactured to the same high quality standards as the original components, so you can be confident of their performance and durability.

Your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best and can provide competent, efficient service. However, service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect. Maintenance may be done by any qualified service facility or person who is skilled in this type of automotive service. Keep all receipts as proof of completion, and have the person who does the work fill out your Maintenance Journal or Canadian Maintenance Log. Check your warranty booklet for more information.

389

389

464

466

480

468

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individual using parts that are certif ied to EPA standards.

Owners Maintenance Checks

452 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

453

:

If the message SERVICE DUE NOW does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

NOTE:

Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil Replace engine oil and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots Suspension components Driveshaft boots Brake hoses and line (including ABS) All fluid levels and condition of fluids Exhaust system Fuel lines and connections

A B

Symbol

:

452

M a in

te n a n ce

M in

d e r

2009 RL

Maintenance Minder

454

Maintenance Sub Items Replace rear differential fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filter If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive belt Replace transmission and transfer fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission and transfer temperatures. This requires transmission and transfer fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission and transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).

Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110F, 43C), or in very low temperatures (under

20F, 29C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/ 100,000 km (Canada).

Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant

Symbol 1 2

3

4

5

Symbol 6

M a in

te n a n ce

M in

d e r

2009 RL

: The power steering fluid reservoir is located under the right compartment cover.

Fluid Locations M

aintenance

455

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK (Orange loop)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)

BRAKE FLUID (Black cap)

WASHER FLUID (Black cap)

POWER STEERING FLUID (Red cap)

ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR

2009 RL

The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by several covers. You may need to remove the covers when you perform some simple maintenance work.

All of the covers are secured by holding clips.

To remove the battery cover, turn the knob of the fastener and remove the holding clips by pushing on the center of each fastener head.

To remove the front bulkhead cover:

Remove the battery cover.

Remove the holding clips by pushing on the center of each fastener head.

1.

2.

Engine Compartment Covers

456

FRONT BULKHEAD COVER BATTERY COVER

: :

CLIPS

CLIPS

KNOB

Push to remove clip Push to reset/install clip

CLIPS

Unlock Lock

2009 RL

To remove the left engine compartment cover:

To remove the right engine compartment cover:

Remove the battery and front bulkhead covers (see page ).

Remove the holding clips by pushing on the center of each fastener head.

Take the windshield washer hose out from the holder on the bottom side of the cover.

When reinstalling the covers, make sure the pins and tabs are in their proper positions.

Remove the holding clips by pushing on the center of each fastener head.

Remove the battery cover (see page ).

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

456

456

Engine Compartment Covers M

aintenance

457

RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT

: :

Push to remove clip Push to reset/install clip

CLIPS CLIPS

CLIP

2009 RL

Install the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait a few minutes, and recheck the oil level. Do not fill above the upper mark; you could damage the engine.

Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap on top of the valve cover. Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled oil could damage components in the engine compartment.

Oil is a major contributor to your engines performance and longevity. Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 detergent oil displaying the API Certification Seal. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving, and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements.

Acura Motor Oil is the preferred 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is highly recommended that you use Acura Motor Oil in your vehicle for optimum engine protection. Make sure the API Certification Seal says For Gasoline Engines. The oil viscosity or weight is provided on the containers label. 5W-20 oil is formulated for year- round protection of your vehicle to improve cold weather starting and fuel economy.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

458

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Ambient Temperature

2009 RL

Your vehicle does not require any oil additives. Additives may adversely affect the engine or transmission performance and durability.

Open the hood, and remove the engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine. Drain the oil into an appropriate container.

Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requires special tools and access from underneath the vehicle. The vehicle should be raised on a service station- type hydraulic lift for this service. Unless you have the knowledge and proper equipment, you should have this maintenance done by a skilled mechanic.

Always change the oil and filter according to the maintenance messages shown on the multi- information display. The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if they are not removed regularly.

You may use a synthetic motor oil if it meets the same requirements given for a conventional motor oil, it displays the API certification seal, and it is the proper weight. You must follow the oil and filter change intervals shown on the maintenance minder display.

1.

2.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter M

aintenance

459

OIL DRAIN BOLT WASHER

2009 RL

Remove the oil filter, and let the remaining oil drain. A special wrench (available from your dealer) is required.

Refill the engine with the recommended oil. Engine oil change capacity (including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The oil pressure indicator should go out within 5 seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for several minutes, then check the drain bolt and oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sit for several minutes, then check the oil level on the dipstick. If necessary, add more oil.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. Tighten the drain bolt to:

Install a new oil filter according to the instructions that come with it.

Make sure the oil filter gasket is not stuck to the engine block. If it is, remove it before installing a new oil filter.

3.

6.

7.

8.

9.

5.

4.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

460

OIL FILTER

29 lbfft (39 Nm , 4.0 kgfm)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can be harmf ul to the environment. If you change your own oil, please dispose of the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed container, and take it to a recycling center. Do not discard it in a trash bin or dump it on the ground.

2009 RL

If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

If the reserve tank is completely empty, you should also check the coolant level in the radiator.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major-brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Make sure it is a high-quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti- freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent antifreeze and 50 percent distilled water. Never add straight antifreeze or plain water.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant M

aintenance

461

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

2009 RL

The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

When the radiator and engine are cool, relieve any pressure in the cooling system by turning the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise.

Lift up the lid on the front bulkhead cover from the front.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

3.

2.1. 4.

Engine Coolant

462

LID RADIATOR CAP

RESERVE TANK

2009 RL

Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank. Fill it to halfway between the MAX and MIN marks. Put the cap back on the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicles cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or engine components.

Reinstall the lid.

5.

6.

7.

Engine Coolant M

aintenance

463 2009 RL

Check the fluid level in the windshield washer reservoir at least monthly during normal use.

Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature.

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality windshield washer fluid. This increases the cleaning capability and prevents freezing in cold weather. When you refill the reservoir, clean the edges of the windshield wiper blades with windshield washer fluid on a clean cloth. This will help to condition them.

If the washer fluid is low, a WASHER FLUID LOW message appears on the multi-information display.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth.

Park the vehicle on level ground. Start the engine, let it run until the radiator fan comes on, then shut off the engine. For accurate results, wait about 60 seconds (but no longer than 90 seconds) before doing step 2.

1.

2.

Windshield Washers Automatic Transmission Fluid

Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid

464

NOTICE:

DIPSTICK

Do not use engine antif reeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze can damage your vehicles paint, while a vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially-available windshield washer f luid.

2009 RL

Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration.

Insert the dipstick all the way into the transmission as shown.

Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.

The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid when this service is shown by a maintenance message on the multi-information display.

If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks.

If you are not sure how to add fluid, contact your dealer.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

Always use Acura ATF-Z1 (automatic transmission fluid).

5.

6.

3.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid M

aintenance

465

UPPER MARK LOWER MARK

Use only Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do not mix with other transmission f luids. Using transmission f luid other than Acura ATF-Z1 may cause deterioration in transmission operation and durability, and could result in damage to the transmission. Damage resulting f rom the use of transmission f luid other than Acura ATF-Z1 is not covered by the Acura new vehicle warranty.

2009 RL

After removing the right engine compartment cover (see page ), check the level on the side of the reservoir when the engine is cold. The fluid should be between the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. If not, add power steering fluid to the UPPER LEVEL mark.

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the MIN mark, your brake system needs attention. Have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoirs monthly.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicles braking system and can cause extensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed container, as a temporary replacement.

To check the fluid level, remove the left engine compartment cover (see page ).

Replace the brake fluid every 3 years, independent of mileage.

457

457

Brake Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

Power Steering FluidBrake Fluid

466

MAX

MIN

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

2009 RL

If you frequently tow a trailer.

In very high temperatures (over 110F, 43C).

In very low temperatures (under 20F, 29C).

The timing belt should be replaced at the intervals shown on the maintenance minder. Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) if you regularly drive your vehicle in one or more of these conditions:

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

A low power steering fluid level can indicate a leak in the system. Check the fluid level frequently, and have the system inspected as soon as possible.

Always use Acura Power Steering Fluid. You may use another power steering fluid as an emergency replacement, but have the power steering system flushed and refilled with Acura PSF as soon as possible.

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

Timing Belt

M aintenance

467

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t or right lock and holding it there can damage the power steering pump.

2009 RL

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic headlight adjusting system that adjusts the vertical angle of the headlights automatically. Refer to page for more information.

The low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the light switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to examine or change a low beam headlight bulb yourself. If a low beam headlight bulb fails, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it replaced.

The headlights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or pull a trailer (if applicable), readjustment may be required. Adjustments should be done by your dealer or another qualified technician.

145

Lights

Headlight Aiming

468 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.

Remove the bulb by turning it one- quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the left or right side engine compartment cover from the side you are working on by carefully pulling the cover out (see page ).

If you are replacing the bulb on the drivers side, remove the battery cover (see page ).

Your vehicle has halogen high beam headlight bulbs which are also used for the daytime running light. Handle it by its base and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

2.

3.

1.

457

491

Lights

Replacing a Headlight/Daytime Running Light Bulb

M aintenance

469

BULB

CONNECTOR

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

2009 RL

Insert the new bulb into the hole, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the headlights to test the new bulb.

Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.

Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Push the bulb in slightly, and turn it counterclockwise.

Remove the left or right side engine compartment cover from the side you are working on by carefully pulling the cover out (see page ).

Reinstall the engine compartment side cover.

(Drivers side) Reinstall the battery cover.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

457

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal Light Bulb

470

BULB SOCKET

2009 RL

CONTINUED

Remove the left or right side engine compartment cover (see page ).

Install the new bulb into the socket.

Insert the socket back into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

Reinstall the engine compartment side cover.

(Drivers side) Reinstall the battery cover.

(Passengers side) Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to remove the holding clip from the windshield washer reservoir.

1.

2.

5.

6.

7.

8.

4.

457

Lights

Replacing a Front Parking/Side Marker Bulb

M aintenance

471 2009 RL

Your vehicle uses halogen light bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Install the new bulb into the socket.

Insert the socket back into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of its socket.

(Passengers side) Reinstall the windshield washer reservoir.

Reinstall the engine compartment side cover.

(Drivers side) Reinstall the battery cover.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

3.

4.

Lights

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb

472

SOCKET

BULB

CLIP Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

2009 RL

Insert the new bulb into the hole, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.

Turn on the fog lights to test the new bulb.

Reinstall the two undercover bolts on the side under cover and tighten them securely. Put the holding clip back on the side undercover and push on the center until it locks (the center is flush with the head).

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.

Remove the bulb by turning it one- quarter turn counterclockwise.

Carefully push up the side under cover into the bumper.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the two undercover bolts, and remove the holding clip with a flat-tipped screwdriver.

3.

4.

5.

6.

8.

7.

1.

2.

Lights M

aintenance

473

CLIP CONNECTOR

BULB

BOLTS

2009 RL

Open the trunk lid, and remove the left or right maintenance lid.

Remove the mounting nut with an 8 mm wrench.

Carefully pry in the top or bottom edge of the trim with a small flat- tipped screwdriver, and pull the trim straight back.

Remove the two mounting bolts with an 8 mm wrench.

Pull the taillight assembly straight back out of the body.

Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned out bulb by pulling it straight out of its socket.

2.

1. 3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Lights

Replacing a Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb

474

MOUNTING NUT

MAINTENANCE LID TAIL LIGHT TRIM

BOLTS

BULB

SOCKET

2009 RL

Install the new bulb in the socket by pushing it straight in the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the light assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

Tighten the mounting nut securely, and reinstall the maintenance lid.

When reinstalling the taillight assembly, align and pop the snap fasteners in place. Tighten the two mounting bolts and reinstall the trim in place.

Remove the socket from the light assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Open the trunk.

Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms.

Remove the light assembly cover by pulling its outside edge.

9.

8.

10.

11.

12.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Lights

Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb

M aintenance

475

COVERS BULB

SOCKET

2009 RL

If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean them. Do not use bleach, dye, or cleaning solvents. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle. Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat belt anchors can cause the belts to retract slowly. Wipe the insides of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in mild soap and warm water or isopropyl alcohol.

This filter removes the dust and pollen that is brought in from the outside through the climate control system.

Have your dealer replace the filter when this service is indicated by a maintenance message on the multi- information display. It should be replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air, or if the flow from the climate control system becomes less than usual.

Reinstall the socket into the light assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

Reinstall the back-up light cover.

5.

6.

7.

Cleaning the Seat BeltsDust and Pollen Filter

Lights, Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts

476

LOOP

2009 RL

The floor mats that came with your vehicle hook over the floor mat anchors. To lock each anchor, turn the knob clockwise. This keeps the floor mats from sliding forward (possibly interfering with the pedals), or backwards (making the front passengers weight sensors ineffective).

If you remove a floor mat, make sure to re-anchor it when you put it back in your vehicle.

Make sure the rear floor mats are properly hooked to the floor mat anchors. Your vehicle is equipped with front passengers seat weight sensors. If the rear passengers floor mat is on the seat rail of the front passengers seat, the sensors will detect the decreased weight on the seat, and they may not work properly.

If you use a non-Acura floor mat, make sure it fits properly and that it can be used with the floor mat anchors. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats.

Floor Mats M

aintenance

477

DRIVERS SIDE FLOOR MAT REAR PASSENGERS FLOOR MAT

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

Lock

ANCHORS

ANCHOR

2009 RL

Push the end of the cover on the blade assembly until the other end is pivoted out, and remove the cover.

Disconnect the blade assembly from the wiper arm by removing the two screws from the arm.

Adjust the windshield wiper arms to the winter position by holding both wiper arms as shown in the illustration at the same time (see page ). Raise the wiper arms off the windshield.

Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every 6 months. Replace them if you find signs of cracking in the rubber, areas that are getting hard, or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used.

2.1.

3. 139

Wiper Blades

478

COVER

SCREWSWIPER ARMS

HOLDING LOCATIONS

BLADE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised, or you will damage the hood and the wiper arms.

2009 RL

Examine the new wiper blades. If they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge, remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade, and install them in the slots along the edge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into the holder until the tabs lock.

Reinstall the blade assembly to the wiper arm and tighten the two screws securely. Reinstall the cover by pushing it in.

Set the wiper arms back on the windshield. Adjust the windshield wipers to their previously parked position.

Remove the blade from its holder by grabbing the tabbed end of the blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs come out of the holder.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

Wiper Blades M

aintenance

479

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

2009 RL

Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best combination of handling, tread life, and riding comfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make your vehicle ride more harshly, are more prone to damage from road hazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) will warn you when a tire pressure is low. See page for information on the TPMS.

The following pages give more detailed information on how to take care of your tires and what to do when they need to be replaced.

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and correctly inflated.

Clean the wheels as you would the rest of the exterior. Wash them with the same solution, and rinse them thoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush can damage the clear-coat. To clean the wheels, use a mild detergent and a soft brush or sponge.

429

Inflation GuidelinesTiresWheels

Wheels, Tires

480

Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

2009 RL

If you check the pressure when the tires are hot [driven for several miles (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold reading. This is normal; do not release air to match the cold pressure. The tires will be underinflated.

You should get your own tire pressure gauge and use it whenever you check your tire pressures. This will make it easier for you to tell if a pressure loss is due to a tire problem and not due to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have some ability to self-seal if they are punctured, you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure.

Even though your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, we recommend that you visually check your tires every day. If you think a tire might be low, check it immediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the air pressure in each tire at least once a month. Even tires that are in good condition may lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month. Remember to check the spare tire at the same time.

Check the pressure in the tires when they are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Add or release air, if needed, to match the recommended cold tire pressures on page .482

Tires M

aintenance

481 2009 RL

The following charts show the recommended cold tire pressures for most normal and high-speed driving conditions.

For convenience, the recommended tire sizes and cold tire pressures are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

For additional technical information about your tires, see page .

We strongly recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you ever drive in a sanctioned competitive event at sustained high speeds (over 112 mph or 181 km/h), be sure to adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below. If you do not, excessive heat can build up and cause sudden tire failure.

The recommended tire pressures for high speed driving are not on the label on the drivers doorjamb, contact your dealer for more information about the tire pressures.

526

Tire Size/Type

Compact Spare

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Cold Tire Pressure

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

U.S. model only

Recommended Tire Pressures

High Speed Driving Normal Driving

High Speed Driving

Tires

482

T155/70D17 110M

P245/45R18 96V

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5 kgf/cm )

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

P245/45R18 96V

2009 RL

Every time you check inflation, you should also examine the tires for damage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace the tire if you can see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

When you return to normal speed driving, be sure to readjust the tire pressure for normal driving. You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire pressure.

Your tires have wear indicators molded into the tread. When the tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire.

A tire this worn gives very little traction on wet roads. You should replace the tire if you can see three or more tread wear indicators.

Tires

Tire Inspection

M aintenance

483

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

2009 RL

The last four digits of the TIN (tire identification number) are found on the sidewall of the tire and indicate the date of manufacture (See

on page ).

The service life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including, but not limited to, driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. It is also recommended that all tires, including the spare, be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

528

Tires

Tire Labeling

Tire Service Life

484 2009 RL

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. A tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This increases riding comfort and tire life. For best results, have the installer perform a dynamic balance.

Replace your tires with radial tires of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tires sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on your vehicle can reduce braking ability, traction, and steering accuracy. Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist system (VSA) to work inconsistently.

To help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly, rotate the tires according to the maintenance messages displayed on the multi-information display. Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. If you purchase directional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

When the tires are rotated, make sure the air pressures are checked.

The ABS and VSA system work by comparing the speed of each wheel. When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Tire size and construction can affect wheel speed and may cause the system to activate.

CONTINUED

Tires

Tire Maintenance Replacing Tires and WheelsTire Rotation

M aintenance

485

(For Non-directional Tires and Wheels)

(For Directional Tires and Wheels)

Front Front

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicles aluminum wheels. Use only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

2009 RL

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possible or necessary, replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicles handling.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for DOT tire quality grading information, and page

for tire size explanation.

Also be sure you use only TPMS specific wheels. If you do not, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work on that tire.

If you ever need to replace a wheel, make sure the wheels specifications match those of the original wheel that came on your vehicle. Replacement wheels are available at your Acura dealer.

528

526

Tires

Wheels and Tires

486

18 x 8.0J AL (TPMS)

P245/45R18 96V

Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.

2009 RL

Tires marked M S or All Season on the sidewall have an all- weather tread design suitable for most winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowy or icy conditions, you should install snow tires or tire chains. They may be required by local laws under certain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may be lower than your original tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires when required by driving conditions or local laws. Install them only on the front tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, Acura strongly recommends using the chain listed below, made by Security Chain Company (SCC).

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1042

CONTINUED

Tires

Winter Driving Snow Tires Tire Chains

M aintenance

487 2009 RL

When installing cables, follow the manufacturers instructions, and mount them as tight as you can. Make sure they are not contacting the brake lines or suspension. Drive slowly with them installed. If you hear them coming into contact with the body or chassis, stop and investigate. Remove them as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

Tires

488

Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicles brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

2009 RL

Check the condition of the battery monthly by looking at the test indicator window. The label on the battery explains the test indicators colors.

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

Check the terminals for corrosion (a white or yellowish powder). To remove it, cover the terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. It will bubble up and turn brown. When this stops, wash it off with plain water. Dry off the battery with a cloth or paper towel. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance is needed, see your dealer or a qualified technician.

If you need to connect the battery to a charger, disconnect both cables to prevent damaging your vehicles electrical system. Always disconnect the negative ( ) cable first, and reconnect it last.

To see the label, remove the battery cover (see page ).491

CONTINUED

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery M

aintenance

489

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do the battery maintenance.

2009 RL

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, all stored driving positions will be lost. To store the driving positions again, see the storing procedure on page .

The navigation system will also disable itself. The next time you turn on the ignition switch, the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used. Refer to the navigation system manual.

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, the audio system may disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio you will see in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the code (see page ).

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, the power tilt and telescopic steering wheel system will be disabled. The system needs to be reset after reconnecting the battery (see page

).

The compass system will also disable itself. The next time you turn on the ignition switch, the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used. Enter the four-digit anti- theft security code (see page ). You will also need to reset the clock according to the instruction of setting the clock (see page ).

163

298

313

280

149

On vehicles with navigation system

On vehicles without navigation system

Checking the Battery

490 2009 RL

To reinstall the cover, reinstall the two holding clips and secure them by pushing on the center of each fastener head.

Turn the knob of the cover to LOCK position as shown in the illustration.

Turn the knob of the battery cover to UNLOCK as shown in the illustration.

Remove the holding clips by pushing on the center of each fastener head.

2.

3.

4.

1.

: :

Checking the Battery

Removing the Battery Cover

M aintenance

491

KNOB

CLIPS

Push to reset/install clip Push to remove clip

Unlock Lock

2009 RL

Cover the vehicle with a breathable cover, one made from a porous material such as cotton. Non-porous materials, such as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run the engine until it reaches full operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle on and off twice). Preferably, do this once a month.

If you need to park your vehicle for an extended period (more than 1 month), there are several things you should do to prepare it for storage. Proper preparation helps prevent deterioration and makes it easier to get your vehicle back on the road. If possible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Wash and dry the exterior completely.

Clean the interior. Make sure the carpeting, floor mats, etc., are completely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Put the transmission in Park.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for a longer period, it should be supported on jackstands so the tires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (if the vehicle is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper blade arms with a folded towel or rag so they do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply a silicone spray lubricant to all door and trunk seals. Also, apply a vehicle body wax to the painted surfaces that mate with the door and trunk seals.

Vehicle Storage

492 2009 RL

This section covers the more common problems that motorists experience with their vehicles. It gives you information about how to safely evaluate the problem and what to do to correct it. If the problem has stranded you on the side of the road, you may be able to get going again. If not, you will also find instructions on getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 494 ....................Changing a Flat Tire . 495

.............If the Engine Wont Start . 499 ................................Jump Starting . 500

..............If the Engine Overheats . 503 .........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 506 ..........Charging System Indicator . 506

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 507 ...............Brake System Indicator . 508

Opening the Fuel Fill Door ....................................Manually . 509

..............................................Fuses . 510 ..............................Fuse Locations . 513

......................Emergency Towing . 519 ..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 519

Taking Care of the Unexpected T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

493 2009 RL

Use the compact spare tire as a temporary replacement only. Get your regular tire repaired or replaced, and put it back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of the compact spare tire every time you check the other tires. It should be inflated to:

Replace the tire when you can see the tread wear indicator bars. The replacement should be the same size and design tire, mounted on the same wheel. The spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular wheel, and the spare wheel is not designed for mounting a regular tire.

Do not mount snow chains on the compact spare tire.

Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle unless it is the same make and model.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride and less traction on some road surfaces. Use greater caution while driving.

After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on. After several miles (kilometers) driving with the spare, this indicator begins to flash, then stays on again. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).433

Compact Spare Tire

494

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

2009 RL

Take the tool case out of the spare tire.

Open the trunk, and fold the trunk floor forward.

Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the spacer cone. Then take the spare tire out of its well.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery ground. Put the transmission in Park. Apply the parking brake. If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it.

Turn on the hazard warning lights, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle while you change the tire.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

495

SPARE TIRETRUNK FLOOR

TOOL CASE JACK

The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

2009 RL

Use the extension and the wheel nut wrench as shown to raise the vehicle until the flat tire is off the ground.

Remove the wheel nuts, then remove the flat tire. Temporarily place the flat tire on the ground with the outside surface of the wheel facing up. You could scratch the wheel if you put it face down.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn with the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jacking point nearest the tire you need to change. It is pointed to by a mark molded into the underside of the body. Turn the end bracket clockwise until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. Make sure the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.

6. 7. 8.

9.

Changing a Flat Tire

496

WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

2009 RL

Before mounting the spare tire, wipe any dirt off the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a clean cloth. Wipe the hub carefully; it may be hot from driving.

Put on the spare tire. Put the wheel nuts back on finger-tight, then tighten them in a crisscross pattern with the wheel nut wrench until the wheel is firmly against the hub. Do not try to tighten the wheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground, and remove the jack.

10. 11. 12.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

497

BRAKE HUB

2009 RL

Store the jack and tools in the tool case. Place the tool case in the flat tire.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely in the same crisscross pattern. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility. Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.

Wrap the spacer cone and spare tire wing bolt with cloth or paper, and store them in the spare tire well.

Lower the trunk floor, then close the trunk lid.

Your vehicles original tire has a tire pressure monitoring system sensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(see page ).

14.13.

15.

16.

17.

18.

430

Changing a Flat Tire

Changing a Tire with TPMS

498

WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

94 lbfft (127 Nm , 13 kgfm)

Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and could seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

2009 RL

When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, you do not hear the normal noise of the engine trying to start. You may hear a clicking sound, a series of clicks, or nothing at all.

Turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position. If the headlights do not dim, check the condition of the fuses. If the fuses are OK, there is probably something wrong with the electrical circuit for the ignition switch or starter motor. You will need a qualified technician to determine the problem. See

on page .

Diagnosing why the engine wont start falls into two areas, depending on what you hear when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position:

Check these things:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. Turn on the headlights, and check their brightness. If the headlights are very dim or do not come on at all, the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Check the transmission interlock. The transmission must be in Park or neutral or the starter will not operate.

Make sure the remote is with you, inside the vehicle.

If the headlights dim noticeably or go out when you try to start the engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are corroded. Check the condition of the battery and terminal connections (see page ). You can then try jump starting the vehicle from a booster battery (see page ).

You can hear the starter motor operating normally, or the starter motor sounds like it is spinning faster than normal, but the engine does not start up and run.

You hear nothing, or almost nothing. The engines starter motor does not operate at all, or operates very slowly.

519

489

500

500

Nothing Happens or the Starter Motor Operates Very Slowly

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Wont Start T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

499 2009 RL

In this case, the starter motors speed sounds normal, or even faster than normal, when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper starting procedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electrical problem, such as no power to the fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you will need a qualified technician to find the problem. See

on page .

Are you using a properly coded built-in key or remote? An improperly coded built-in key or remote will cause the immobilizer system indicator in the instrument panel to blink rapidly (see page

).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuel gauge; the low fuel indicator may not be working.

Although this seems like a simple procedure, you should take several precautions.

You cannot start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it.

64

403

512

519

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting the Engine

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Wont Start, Jump Starting

500

A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

2009 RL

Open the hood, and check the physical condition of the battery. In very cold weather, check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or frozen, do not try jump starting until it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces- sories: heater, A/C, climate control, stereo system, lights, etc. Put the transmission in Park, and set the parking brake.

Remove the battery cover (see page ), then remove the secondary under-hood fuse box cover from the positive ( ) terminal on the battery.

The numbers in the illustration show you the order to connect the jumper cables.

Connect one jumper cable to the positive ( ) terminal on your vehicles battery. Connect the other end to the positive ( ) terminal on the booster battery.

1.

2.

3.

4.

451

CONTINUED

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

Jump Starting T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

501

COVER

BOOSTER BATTERY

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze. Attempting to jump start with a f rozen battery can cause it to rupture.

2009 RL

Start your vehicle. If the starter motor still operates slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running, disconnect the negative cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery. Disconnect the positive cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery.

Reinstall the secondary under- hood fuse box cover over the positive ( ) terminal of the battery, then reinstall the battery cover.

If the booster battery is in another vehicle, have an assistant start that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Keep the ends of the jumper cables away from each other and any metal on the vehicle until everything is disconnected. Otherwise, you may cause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal on the booster battery. Connect the other end to the grounding point as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part of the engine.

7.

5.

6.

8.

9.

Jump Starting

502

Connecting the jumper cable to the secondary under-hood f use box causes the f uses to blow.

2009 RL

The pointer of the vehicles temperature gauge should stay in the midrange. If it climbs to the red mark, you should determine the reason (hot day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you should take immediate action. The only indication may be the temperature gauge climbing to or above the red mark. Or you may see steam or spray coming from under the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray, leave the engine running and watch the temperature gauge. If the high heat is due to overloading, the engine should start to cool down almost immediately. If it does, wait until the temperature gauge comes down to the midpoint, then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays at the red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Everything is still extremely hot, so use caution. If you find a leak, it must be repaired before you continue driving (see

on page ).

If you see steam and/or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine. Wait until you see no more signs of steam or spray, then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road. Put the transmission in Park, and set the parking brake. Turn off all the accessories, and turn on the hazard warning lights.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

519

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Overheats T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

503

Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer at the red mark can cause serious damage to the engine.

2009 RL

If you do not find an obvious leak, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Add coolant if the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in the reserve tank, you may need to add coolant to the radiator. Let the engine cool down until the pointer reaches the middle of the tempera- ture gauge, or lower, before check- ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavy cloth, turn the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pushing down, to the first stop. After the pressure releases, push down on the cap, and turn it until it comes off.

Put the radiator cap back on tightly. Run the engine, and check the temperature gauge. If it goes back to the red mark, the engine needs repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. If it has gone down, add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on tightly.

Start the engine, and set the interior temperature to maximum (climate control to FULL AUTO at ). Add coolant to the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. If you do not have the proper coolant mixture available, you can add plain water. Remember to have the cooling system drained and refilled with the proper mixture as soon as you can.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

519 Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

504

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

2009 RL

You can still drive your vehicle even if this message appears on the multi- information display, however you should check the temperature gauge while driving.

If you notice the temperature gauge climbing to or above the red mark, safely pull to the side of the road. Follow the instructions on pages

and .

If there is a problem with the radiator system, you will see a CHECK RADIATOR SYSTEM on the multi-information display.

If you see this message, the engine has probably overheated. You should take your vehicle to a dealer, and have it repaired as soon as possible.

503 504

Check Radiator System

If the Engine Overheats T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

505 2009 RL

Let the vehicle sit for a minute. Open the hood, and check the oil level (see page ). An engine very low on oil can lose pressure during cornering and other driving maneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring the level back to the full mark on the dipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oil pressure indicator. If it does not go out within 10 seconds, turn off the engine. There is a mechanical problem that needs to be repaired before you can continue driving (see on page

).

Immediately turn off all electrical accessories. Try not to use other electrically operated controls such as the power windows. Keep the engine running; starting the engine will discharge the battery rapidly.

Go to a dealer or a service station where you can get technical assistance.

Safely pull off the road and shut off the engine. Turn on the hazard warning lights.This indicator should never come on

when the engine is running. If it starts flashing or stays on, or if you see a CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL message on the multi- information display, the oil pressure has dropped very low or lost pressure. Serious engine damage is possible, and you should take immediate action.

If the charging system indicator comes on brightly when the engine is running, or if you see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display, the battery is not being charged.

1.

2.

3.

4.

389

458

519 Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

506

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. Turn of f the engine as soon as you can saf ely get the vehicle stopped.

2009 RL

Your vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set. If they are not set, the test cannot be completed.

If this indicator comes on while driving, or if you see a CHECK EMISSION

SYSTEM message on the multi- information display, it means one of the engines emissions control systems may have a problem. Even though you may feel no difference in your vehicles performance, it can reduce your fuel economy and cause increased emissions. Continued operation may cause serious damage.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly, even though it may go off as you continue driving, have the vehicle checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the indicator coming on could be due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap. You will also see a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message on the multi-information display. Tighten the cap until it clicks at least once (see page ). Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator off immediately; it can take several days of normal driving.

If the battery in your vehicle has been disconnected or gone dead, these codes may be erased. It can take several days of driving under various conditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. If possible, do not take your vehicle for an emissions test until the readiness codes are set. Refer to for more information (see page ).

387

535

Readiness Code

Emissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator Lamp T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

507

If you keep driving with the malf unction indicator lamp on, you can damage your vehicles emissions controls and engine. Those repairs may not be covered by your vehicles warranties.

2009 RL

However, if the brake pedal does not feel normal, you should take immediate action. A problem in one part of the systems dual circuit design will still give you braking at two wheels. You will feel the brake pedal go down much farther before the vehicle begins to slow down, and you will have to press harder on the pedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lower gear, and pull to the side of the road when it is safe. Because of the long distance needed to stop, it is hazardous to drive the vehicle. You should have it towed and repaired as soon as possible (see

on page ).

If the fluid level is low, take your vehicle to a dealer, and have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.

You will also see a CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi- information display.

If the brake system indicator comes on while driving, the brake fluid level is probably low. You will see a BRAKE FLUID LOW message on the multi-information display. Press lightly on the brake pedal to see if it feels normal. If it does, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop at a service station (see page

).

The brake system indicator normally comes on when

you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and as a reminder to check the parking brake. If you do not release the parking brake, the indicator will stay on, and you will see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the multi- information display.

466

519 Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

508

U.S. Canada

2009 RL

If you must drive the vehicle a short distance in this condition, drive slowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSA system indicator come on with the brake system indicator, have your vehicle inspected by your dealer immediately.

If the fuel fill door release button does not work, use the release lever inside the left maintenance lid in the trunk.

To open the fuel fill door, pull the release lever rearward.

Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually

Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

509

RELEASE LEVERMAINTENANCE LID

2009 RL

The fuses are located in five fuse boxes. The interior fuse boxes are located under the dashboard on the drivers and passengers side.

To remove the fuse box lid, put your finger in the notch on the lid, pull it toward you, and take it out of its hinges.

To open the secondary fuse box lid, push the tab in the direction as shown in the illustration.

Fuses

510

NOTCH NOTCH

INTERIOR FUSE BOX Drivers side

INTERIOR FUSE BOX Passengers side

SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX Drivers side

FUSE BOX

2009 RL

The primary under-hood fuse box is in the engine compartment on the drivers side. To open it, push the tabs as shown.

The secondary under-hood fuse box is on the battery. To open it, push the tabs as shown.

To check the fuse box, remove the battery cover first (see page ).491

Fuses T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

511

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

TAB

TAB

2009 RL

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Make sure the headlights and all other accessories are off.

If something electrical in your vehicle stops working, the first thing you should check for is a blown fuse. Determine from the chart on pages

, , and , or the diagram on the fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses control that device. Check those fuses first, but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is the cause. Replace any blown fuses, and check if the device works.

Check each of the large fuses in the under-hood fuse box by looking through the top at the wire inside. Removing these fuses requires a Phillips-head screwdriver.Remove the cover from the fuse

box.

3.1.

2.

516 517 518

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

512

FUSE

BLOWN BLOWN

2009 RL

CONTINUED

Check the smaller fuses in the under-hood fuse box and all the fuses in the interior fuse boxes by pulling out each fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is inside the primary under-hood fuse box.

Look for a blown wire inside the fuse. If it is blown, replace it with one of the spare fuses of the same rating or lower.

4. 5.

Fuses T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

513

FUSE FUSE PULLER BLOWNBLOWN

2009 RL

If you cannot drive the vehicle without fixing the problem, and you do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the same rating or a lower rating from one of the other circuits with the fuse puller provided in the under- hood fuse box. Make sure you can do without that circuit temporarily (such as the accessory power socket or radio). If you replace the blown fuse with a spare fuse that has a lower rating, it might blow out again. This does not indicate anything wrong. Replace the fuse with one of the correct rating as soon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of the same rating blows in a short time, there is probably a serious electrical problem with your vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in that circuit, and have your vehicle checked by a qualified technician.

6.

Fuses

514

SPARE FUSES

FUSE PULLER

Replacing a f use with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. If you do not have a replacement f use with the proper rating f or the circuit, install one with a lower rating.

2009 RL

If the fuse for the driving position memory system is removed, all stored driving positions will be lost. To store the driving positions again, see page .

If the navigation system fuse is removed, the navigation system will disable itself. The next time you turn on the ignition switch, the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used. Refer to the navigation system manual.

If the compass system fuse is removed, the compass system will disable itself. The next time you turn on the ignition switch, the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used. Enter the four- digit anti-theft security code (see page ). You will also need to reset the clock according to the setting the clock instructions (see

page ).

If the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. The next time you turn on the audio system you will see in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code (see page ).

If the fuse for the power tilt telescopic steering is removed, the system will be disabled. The system needs to be reset after reinstalling the fuse (see page ).

163

298

313

280

149

On vehicles with navigation system

On vehicles without navigation system

Fuses T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

515 2009 RL

No.

No. Amps.

No.

Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected Amps. Circuits ProtectedAmps.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 50 A

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23

Radiator fan

Left headlight low beam Rear defroster coil Left headlight high beam Small light Right headlight high beam Right headlight low beam Back-up FI ECU Wiper Headlight washer Fog lights MG clutch Horn, Stop Rear defroster

40 A 15 A 30 A 40 A 40 A

(40 A) 40 A 70 A

120 A 50 A 50 A

Back-up, ACC Hazard ABS/VSA motor ABS/VSA Drive by wire, LAF heater Option Heater motor Passengers fuse box Battery IG main Power window

15 A 30 A 10 A 15 A 10 A 15 A 7.5 A 15 A 30 A 30 A 10 A 7.5 A 15 A 40 A

: On Canadian models

Fuse Locations

516

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

2009 RL

No.

No.

No. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedAmps.

Amps.

Amps.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

30 31 32 33

ACG Fuel Pump IGN SOL Meter SRS IGP (PGM-FI ECU) Left rear power window ETS (telescopic) ETS (tilt) Drivers power window Moonroof Adaptive Front Lighting System Air Conditioner e-pretensioner ACC Option

Starter diag. Starter signal

Drive by Wire Ignition coil Daytime running light LAF heater Radio Interior light Back-up Door lock Accessory socket Occupant position detection system Wiper Rear heated seat

Drivers power seat sliding

Drivers power seat reclining

15 A 15 A 10 A 15 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 7.5 A

15 A 15 A 20 A 20 A 7.5 A 20 A

7.5 A 7.5 A

20 A 15 A 20 A 15 A 10 A 10 A 7.5 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 30 A 20 A 7.5 A

7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A

(7.5 A)

Passengers power seat sliding

Passengers power seat reclining

Tire pressure monitoring system

Fuse Locations T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

517

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Drivers side

SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Drivers side

2009 RL

No. Amps. No. Amps.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

1 2 3 4

5

30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A

20 A

6 7

8

9

20 A 7.5 A

30 A

7.5 A

SH-AWD Premium amplifier Passengers power window Drivers automatic seat belt tensioner/e-pretensioner Right rear power window

Heated seats Illumination lights Passengers automatic seat belt tensioner/ e-pretensioner Air conditioner

Fuse Locations

518

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passengers side

2009 RL

To use the towing hook: Remove the cover from the front bumper by pushing the right corner edge of the cover with a finger until the cover comes out as shown in the illustration.

The operator will load your vehicle on the back of a truck. Any other method of towing will damage the drive system. When you contact the towing agency, inform them a flat-bed is required.

If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service or organization. Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, or snow, call a towing service to pull it out (see the previous column).

For very short distances, such as freeing the vehicle, you can use the detachable towing hook that mounts on the anchor in the front bumper.

1.

CONTINUED

The only way you can safely tow your vehicle is with flat-bed equipment.

Emergency Towing If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

519

COVER

Towing with only two tires on the ground will damage parts of the all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle should be transported on a f lat-bed truck or trailer.

2009 RL

Screw the towing hook into the hole, and tighten it with the wheel nut wrench.

Remove the towing hook and wheel nut wrench from the tool case in the spare tire.

The cover is attached to the bumper with a tether.

2.

3.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

520

WHEEL NUT WRENCHCOVER

TETHER

To avoid damage to your vehicle, use the towing hook f or straight, f lat ground towing only. Do not tow at an angle. The tow hook should not be used to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do not use it as a tie down.

2009 RL

The diagrams in this section give you the dimensions and capacities of your vehicle, and the location of identification numbers. It also includes information you should know about your vehicles tires and emissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 522 ................................Specifications . 524

DOT Tire Quality Grading ......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 526

.................................Treadwear . 526 ......................................Traction . 526

.............................Temperature . 527 .................................Tire Labeling . 528

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal

............................Explanation . 530

.......................Emissions Controls . 532 .....................The Clean Air Act . 532

Crankcase Emissions Control ....................................System . 532

Evaporative Emissions Control ....................................System . 532

Onboard Refueling Vapor ................................Recovery . 532

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 533 ....................PGM-FI System . 533

Ignition Timing Control ................................System . 533

Exhaust Gas Recirculation ...................(EGR) System . 533

Three Way Catalytic ...........................Converter . 533

....................Replacement Parts . 533 Three Way Catalytic

.................................Converters . 534 ........................Emissions Testing . 535

Technical Information T echnicalInform

ation

521 2009 RL

Your vehicle has several identifying numbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the 17-digit number your dealer uses to register your vehicle for warranty purposes. It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard. You can see it by looking through the windshield on the drivers side. It is also on the certification label attached to the drivers doorjamb, and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also provided in bar code on the certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

522

U.S. vehicle is shown.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

2009 RL

The engine number is stamped into the engine block. It is on the front left, below the valve cover.

The transmission number is on a label on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers T echnicalInform

ation

523

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

2009 RL

Specifications

524

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Seating Capacities

Capacities

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

195.8 in (4,973 mm) 72.7 in (1,847 mm) 57.3 in (1,455 mm) 110.2 in (2,800 mm) 62.0 in (1,575 mm) 62.4 in (1,585 mm)

1.59 US gal (6.0 ) 2.27 US gal (8.6 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 ) 3.0 US qt (2.8 ) 8.1 US qt (7.7 )

Length Width Height Wheelbase Track

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached to the drivers doorjamb.

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine Reserve tank capacity:

6.9 US qt (6.5 ) 2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.45 US qt (0.43 ) 0.48 US qt (0.45 )

3.3 US qt (3.1 ) Refrigerant type Charge quantity Lubricant type ND-OIL8

15.8 17.60 oz (450 500 g) HFC-134a (R-134a)

Total Front Rear

5 2 3

0.77 US qt (0.73 ) 0.79 US qt (0.75 )

19.4 US gal (73 )

2.8 US qt (2.7 )

0.16 US gal (0.58 )

Fuel tank

Engine coolant Engine oil

Automatic transmission fluid Rear differential fluid

SH-AWD differential case SH-AWD clutch case

Transfer assembly fluid Windshield washer reservoir

1 :

2 :

Approx.

Front Rear

Change Total Change

Including filter Without filter

Total Change Total

Change Total

Change Total Change Total

U.S. vehicles Canadian vehicles

1

2

2009 RL

Specifications T echnicalInform

ation

525

Engine

Alignment

Tires

Battery

Fuses

Lights

12 V 12 V

60 W 24/2.2 CP 3.54 x 3.78 in (90 x 96 mm)

223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm ) 11.2 : 1

ILZKR7B-11S SXU22HCR11S

SOHC VTEC V-6 gasoline engineType Bore x Stroke Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs

0.00 in (0.0 mm) 0.08 in (2.0 mm)

08 115

210

P245/45R18 96V

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure T155/70D17 110M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V

1.5 CP

Capacity 12 V 55 AH/5 HR 72 AH/20 HR12 V

Interior

Under-hood

Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube (D2S).

21 W 21 W 35 W 5 W 8 W 8 W 2 W 2 CP 5 W

Headlights (High Beam) Front turn signal Front side marker/Parking lights Rear turn signal lights Back-up light Fog lights License plate lights Ceiling lights

Vanity mirror lights Door courtesy lights Trunk lights

12 V 5 W

See page 517 and 518 or the fuse label attached to the inside of each fuse box cover. See page 516 or the fuse box cover.

Front Rear Front Rear Front

NGK: DENSO:

(HB3)

: Front/Rear Spare Front Rear Spare

(Amber)

(H8)

Front Rear

inside trunk trunk lid

(Amber)

2009 RL

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

The treadwear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condi- tions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear Traction

526 2009 RL

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature

T echnicalInform

ation

527 2009 RL

The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.

Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the following example. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width).

Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Manufacturers identification mark.

P

R

V

DOT

245

B97R

45

18

96

Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)

Tire Size

528

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1)

(1)

(3)(4)

(1) (2) (3) (4)Maximum Tire Load

(2)

Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN) Maximum Tire Pressure

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

P245/45R18 96V

2009 RL

Tire type code.

The maximum air pressure the tire can hold.

The maximum load the tire can carry at maximum air pressure.

Max Load

Max Press

Date of manufacture. Year Week

FW6X

2202

Tire Labeling

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

T echnicalInform

ation

529 2009 RL

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

530 2009 RL

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation T echnicalInform

ation

531 2009 RL

The burning of gasoline in your vehicles engine produces several by- products. Some of these are carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline evaporating from the tank also produces hydrocarbons. Con- trolling the production of NOx, CO, and HC is important to the environ- ment. Under certain conditions of sunlight and climate, NOx and HC react to form photochemical smog. Carbon monoxide does not contri- bute to smog creation, but it is a poisonous gas.

In Canada, Acura vehicles comply with the Canadian emission requirements, as specified in an agreement with Environment Canada, at the time they are manufactured.

Your vehicle has a positive crankcase ventilation system. This keeps gasses that build up in the engines crankcase from going into the atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routes them from the crankcase back to the intake manifold. They are then drawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fuel tank, an evaporative emissions control canister filled with charcoal adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this canister while the engine is off. After the engine is started and warmed up, the vapor is drawn into the engine and burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) system captures the fuel vapors during refueling. The vapors are adsorbed in a canister filled with activated carbon. While driving, the fuel vapors are drawn into the engine and burned off.

The United States Clean Air Act sets standards for automobile emissions. It also requires that automobile manufacturers explain to owners how their emissions controls work and what to do to maintain them. This section summarizes how the emissions controls work. Scheduled maintenance is on pages

and .445 452

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions Control System

Evaporative Emissions Control System

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery

Emissions Controls

532 2009 RL

The exhaust emissions controls include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing control, exhaust gas recirculation, and three way catalytic converter. These four systems work together to control the engines combustion and minimize the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that come out the tailpipe. The exhaust emissions control systems are separate from the crankcase and evaporative emissions control systems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequential multiport fuel injection. It has three subsystems: air intake, engine control, and fuel control. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses various sensors to determine how much air is going into the engine. It then controls how much fuel to inject under all operating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts the ignition timing, reducing the amount of HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system takes some of the exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces the amount of NOx produced when the fuel is burned.

The emissions control systems are designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to levels that comply with the Clean Air Act. To make sure the emissions remain low, you should use only new Acura replacement parts or their equivalent for repairs. Using lower quality parts may increase the emissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems are covered by warranties separate from the rest of your vehicle. Read your warranty manual for more informa- tion.The three way catalytic converters

are in the exhaust system. Through chemical reactions, they convert HC, CO, and NOx in the engines exhaust to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen (N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls T echnicalInform

ation

533 2009 RL

The three way catalytic converters contain precious metals that serve as catalysts, promoting chemical reactions to convert the exhaust gasses without affecting the metals. The catalytic converters are referred to as three-way catalysts, since they act on HC, CO, and NOx. Replacement units must be original Acura parts or their equivalent.

The three way catalytic converters must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take place. They can set on fire any combustible materials that come near them. Park your vehicle away from high grass, dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalytic converter contributes to air pollution, and can impair your engines per- formance. Follow these guidelines to protect your vehicles three way catalytic converters.

Always use unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals, making the three way catalytic converters ineffective.

Have your vehicle diagnosed and repaired if it is misfiring, back- firing, stalling, or otherwise not running properly.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Three Way Catalytic Converters

534

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

2009 RL

If you take your vehicle for an emissions test shortly after the battery has been disconnected or gone dead, it may not pass the test. This is because of certain readiness codes that must be set in the on- board diagnostics for the emissions systems. These codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If the testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you will be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If you must get the vehicle retested within the next two or three days, you can condition the vehicle for retesting by doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly, but not completely, full (around 3/4).

Without touching the accelerator pedal, start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there until the temperature gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 6 hours or more.

Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40 and 95F (4 and 35C).

Without touching the accelerator pedal, let the engine idle for 20 seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing T echnicalInform

ation

535 2009 RL

Then drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

Stop the vehicle, turn off the ignition switch, and leave it off for 30 minutes.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see your dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D. Do not use the cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing

536 2009 RL

..........Client Service Information . 538 ....................Warranty Coverages . 539

Reporting Safety Defects ..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 540

.....................Authorized Manuals . 541

Warranty and Client Relations W

arranty and

C lientR

elations

537 2009 RL

If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealerships management, contact Acura Client Services.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands:

When you call or write, please give us this information:

Acura dealership personnel are trained professionals. They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealerships management. The service manager or general manager can help. Almost all problems are solved in this way.

Vehicle identification number (see page ) Name and address of the dealer who services your vehicle Date of purchase Mileage on your vehicle Your name, address, and tele- phone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

522

Client Service Information

538

American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Acura Client Services Mail Stop 500-2N-7E 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Vortex Motor Corp. Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Acura Client Services Honda Canada Inc. 715 Milner Avenue Toronto, ON M1B 2K8

Tel: 1-866-78-ACURA Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

2009 RL

covers your new vehicle, except for the battery, emissions control systems, and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

provides coverage for as long as the pur- chaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

this warranty gives up to 100% credit toward a replacement battery.

a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

covers all Acura replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

Acura accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty manual for details.

all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2009 Acura warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2009 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty W arranty

and C

lientR elations

539 2009 RL

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from .

If NHTSA receives similar com- plaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

540

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

2009 RL

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

(U.S. only)Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual: A uthorized

M anuals

541

Form Description

2005-2009 Acura RL Service Manual

2005-2009 Acura RL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2005 Model Series Acura RL Body Repair Manual

2009 Acura RL Body Repair Manual Supplement

2009 Acura RL Owners Manual

2009 Acura RL Navigation System Manual

2009 Acura RL Maintenance Journal

2009 Acura RL Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SJA04

61SJA04EL

61SJA30

61SJA31

31SJA640

31SJA820

31SJAM40

31SJAQ40

ACU-R

www. helminc. com

2009 RL

542 2009 RL

CONTINUED

Battery Charging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 506 ............................Jump Starting . 500

..............................Maintenance . 489 ..........................................Cover . 491

............................Specifications . 525 ..............................Before Driving . 383

..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 21 .........................Beverage Holders . 194

.......Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 355 ..................................Booster Seats . 53

Brakes Anti-lock Brake System

.....................................(ABS) . 417 .............Break-in, New Linings . 384

...........................................Fluid . 466 .......................................Parking . 191

.................System Indicator . 63, 508 ........................Wear Indicators . 416

.............................Braking System . 416 .................Break-in, New Vehicle . 384

Brightness Control, ...............................Instruments . 146

Bulb Replacement ..........................Back-up Lights . 475

.................................Fog Lights . 472 ................Front Parking Lights . 471

........Front Side Marker Lights . 471 .................................Headlights . 469

............................Specifications . 525 ............Turn Signal Lights . 470, 474

....................................Accessories . 393 ACCESSORY (Ignition Switch

.....................................Position) . 152 ............Accessory Power Sockets . 197

......................................AcuraLink . 338 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

.....................................Indicator . 319 ...................................Operation . 321

Adaptive Front Lighting System ..........................................(AFS) . 144

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 458 .............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 27

............................Air Conditioning . 204 .......................Air Pressure, Tires . 482 .......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 385

......................................Antifreeze . 461 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 64, 417 ...................................Operation . 417

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 280 Anti-theft Steering Column

............................................Lock . 152 ................................Audio System . 213

Auto Control Mode, Starting ........................................Engine . 403

..........Automatic Climate Control . 211 .......................Automatic Lighting . 141

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 23 .............Automatic Speed Control . 316 ..............Automatic Transmission . 405

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 524 ...............Checking Fluid Level . 464

.......................................Shifting . 405 Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 405 ................Shift Lever Positions . 406

....................Shift Lock Release . 407 ......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 277

Index

A

B

IN D

E X

I 2009 RL

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii ...................................Dashboard . 4, 60

..............Daytime Running Lights . 142 .......................................Indicator . 65

.....................................Built-in-key . 167 ..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 469

............................Capacities Chart . 524 .............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

....................Cargo, How to Carry . 395 .............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

.........................................CD Care . 274 .......................CD Error Message . 271

...................................CD Changer . 236 ................................Ceiling Lights . 200

........................Certification Label . 522 .................................Chains, Tires . 487

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 495 Changing Oil

........................................How to . 459 ......................................When to . 445

..........Charging System Indicator . 506 ............Checklist, Before Driving . 402

.....................................Child Safety . 38 ..............................Booster Seats . 53

...................................Child Seats . 45 .....Important Safety Reminders . 38

..........................................Infants . 43

..........................Larger Children . 52 .........................................LATCH . 47

......................Risks with Airbags . 39 .............................Small Children . 44

.........................................Tethers . 51 .........Where Should a Child Sit? . 39

.......................................Child Seats . 43 .........................................LATCH . 47

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51 ................Childproof Door Locks . 155

Cleaning ...................................Seat Belts . 476

....................Client Service Office . 538 ...............Climate Control System . 204

.........................Clock, Setting the . 313 ........................CO in the Exhaust . 532

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 403 Collision Mitigation Brake System

(CMBS) .....................................Indicator . 424 ...................................Operation . 420

......................Compact Spare Tire . 494 ...........................Compass System . 281

.................Console Compartment . 195

.................Consumer Information . 538 .............Controls, Instruments and . 59

Coolant ........................................Adding . 461

....................................Checking . 389 .........................Proper Solution . 461

...................Temperature Gauge . 70 Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 532 ................Cruise Control Indicator . 65 ............Cruise Control Operation . 316

...................................Cup Holders . 194 .........................Customize Settings . 81

...................................ACC Setup . 89 ................Door/Window Setup . 122

.......KEYLESS ACCESS Setup . 108 ...........................Lighting Setup . 115

.................................Meter Setup . 94 ...........................Position Setup . 103

........................Setting to Default . 85 ...............................Wiper Setup . 133

Index

C

D

II 2009 RL

CONTINUED

...................................Fan, Interior . 206 .........................................Features . 203

..............................Economy, Fuel . 390 ..................................Emergencies . 493

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 500 ...........Brake System Indicator . 508

................Changing a Flat Tire . 495 .....Charging System Indicator . 506

..................Checking the Fuses . 512 .......Hazard Warning Flashers . 146

............................Jump Starting . 500 .....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 506 ...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 507

Opening the Fuel Fill Door ................................Manually . 509

..................Overheated Engine . 503 .......................................Towing . 519

.........................Emergency Brake . 191 ....................Emergency Flashers . 146

......................Emergency Towing . 519 ..........Emergency Trunk Opener . 155

.......................Emissions Controls . 532 ........................Emissions Testing . 535

Engine ............Check Starting System . 404

...............Compartment Covers . 456

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 70 .........................If It Wont Start . 499

Malfunction Indicator ................................Lamp . 62, 507

.........................................Oil life . 445 ........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 506 ..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 458

...............................Overheating . 503 ............................Specifications . 525 ............................Speed Limiter . 407

.......................................Starting . 403 ...................Engine Speed Limiter . 407

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 385 .Evaporative Emissions Controls . 532

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56 Exhaust Gas Recirculation

........................................System . 533 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 19

.................................Dead Battery . 499 ............Defects, Reporting Safety . 540

..............Defogger, Rear Window . 147

..............Defrosting the Windows . 210 ..........................Differential Fluid . 524

....................................Dimensions . 524 .............Dimming the Headlights . 140

Dipstick ..........Automatic Transmission . 464

..................................Engine Oil . 389 ........................Directional Signals . 140

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 416 .....................Disposal of Used Oil . 460

Doors ............Locking and Unlocking . 153

..................Lockout Prevention . 153 .................Monitor Indicator . 13, 79 ....................Power Door Locks . 153

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 526 ...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7

.......................................Drivers ID . 81 ...........................................Driving . 401

....................................Economy . 390 Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 163 ..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 476

Index

E

F

IN D

E X

III 2009 RL

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 385 Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 476 ...............................................Oil . 459

...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 146 ...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 495

.....................................Floor Mats . 477 Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 464 ..........................................Brake . 466

..........................Power Steering . 466 ..................Windshield Washer . 464

.....................................Fog Lights . 142 ........................Four-way Flashers . 146

............................Front Airbags . 11, 29 ......................................Front Seat . 156 ....................................Adjusting . 156

.......................................Heaters . 181

...................................Airbags . 11, 29 ...........................Air Ventilation . 182

.................................................Fuel . 384 ......................Fill Door and Cap . 385

...........................................Gauge . 70 .....................Low Fuel Indicator . 66

................Octane Requirement . 384

Opening the Fuel Fill Door ................................Manually . 509 ...............................Oxygenated . 385

........................Tank, Refueling . 385 ......................Tighten Fuel Cap . 386 .....................Fuses, Checking the . 512

................Gas Mileage Improving . 391 .........................................Gasoline . 384 ...........................................Gauge . 70

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 66 ................Octane Requirement . 384

........................Tank, Refueling . 385 ................Gas Station Procedures . 385

.............................................Gauges . 70 ...Engine Coolant Temperature . 70

...............................................Fuel . 70 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 438 ............Gearshift Lever Positions . 405

......................................Glove Box . 193 ...........................GPS initialization . 299

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight .......................................Rating) . 438

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 469 ......HandsFreeLink , Bluetooth . 355

............Hazard Warning Flashers . 146 Headlights

Adaptive Front Lighting System ......................................(AFS) . 144

........................................Aiming . 468 ..................Automatic Lighting . 141

.........Daytime Running Lights . 142 ..................High Beam Indicator . 65

....................Lights On Indicator . 64 ..........Low Beams, Turning on . 140

.......................Reminder Chime . 140 ........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 469

..........High beams, Turning on . 140 ...................................Washer . 138

............................Head Restraints . 157 ...............................Heated Mirror . 162

...................................Heater, Seat . 181 .............High Altitude, Starting at . 403

HomeLink Universal ................................Transceiver . 334

.......................Hood, Opening the . 387 ...........................................Horn . 5, 136

Index

G

H

IV 2009 RL

CONTINUED

................................................Keys . 150 ................Keyless Access System . 166 ...............Keyless Access Remote . 167

...........Keyless Memory Settings . 173

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 522 Ignition

............................................Keys . 150 .........................................Switch . 152

............Timing Control System . 533 ......................Immobilizer System . 151

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8 .........................................Indicators . 62

ABS (Anti-lock Brake ............................System) . 64, 417

Adaptive Front lighting ..................System (AFS) . 69, 144

Brake (Parking and Brake ............................System) . 63, 508

................Charging System . 62, 506 Collision Mitigation Brake

..............System (CMBS) . 69, 424 .............................Cruise Control . 66

Electronically Controlled Power ........Steering System (ECPS) . 68

.....................................Fog Light . 65 ...................................High Beam . 65

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 64 .....Keyless Access System . 68, 179

.....................................Lights On . 64 ......................................Low Fuel . 66

................Low Oil Pressure . 62, 506 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS

...........................Indicator . 67, 429 .............Malfunction (MIL) . 62, 507

.......................................Message . 68 ..............Seat Belt Reminder . 21, 62

..................Security System . 69, 315 ......................................SH-AWD . 66

...........................Side Airbag Off . 63 ...............................................SRS . 63

Turn Signal and Hazard ...................................Warning . 64

..VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) . 65 VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)

.........................Activation . 65, 435 .........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61

...............................Infant Restraint . 43 ......................................Infant Seats . 43

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51 ...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 480

.................................Inside Mirror . 161 .............................Inspection, Tire . 483

............................Instrument Panel . 61 ......Instrument Panel Brightness . 146

................Interface Dial . 205, 213, 338 ...............................Interior Lights . 200

........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 496 .......................................Jack, Tire . 495

................................Jump Starting . 500

.......................Label, Certification . 522 ...............Lane Change, Signaling . 140

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 22

........................Lights On Indicator . 64

Index IN

D E

X

I

J

K

L

V 2009 RL

Lights ....................Bulb Replacement . 469

.......................................Indicator . 61 ......................................Position . 140

................................Turn Signal . 140 .....................................Load Limit . 437

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 152 Locks

.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 152 ........................Childproof Door . 155

............................Fuel Fill Door . 385 ..................................Glove Box . 193

...............................Power Door . 153 .........................................Trunk . 154

......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 160 ........................Low Coolant Level . 389 .........................Low Fuel Indicator . 66

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 506 ...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 524

..........................Luggage, Storing . 395

..................................Maintenance . 443 ................................Main Items . 453

........................................Minder . 445

Owners Maintenance ...................................Checks . 452

..........................................Safety . 444 ...................................Sub Items . 454

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 507 ...........Memory, Driving Position . 163

.............................Message Display . 78 ..........................Message Indicator . 68

...............................Meters, Gauges . 70 ...................Methanol in Gasoline . 385

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 161 .................................Modifications . 393

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 394 ................................Moonroof . 187-190

................................................MP3 . 243 .............Multi-Information Display . 71

...................Neutral Gear Position . 406 ..................New Vehicle Break-in . 384

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i ...............Numbers, Identification . 522

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 384 .........................................Odometer . 72

...............................Odometer, Trip . 72 Oil

........................Change, How to . 459 ......................Change, When to . 445 ......................Checking Engine . 389

...............................Life, Engine . 445 ..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 506

Selecting Proper Viscosity ......................................Chart . 458

.....ON (Ignition Switch Position) . 152 Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 532 ............................Outside Mirrors . 161

....Outside Temperature Indicator . 73 ....................Overheating, Engine . 503

....Owners Maintenance Checks . 452 .........................Oxygenated Fuels . 385

..............................Paddle Shifters . 409 ............Panel Brightness Control . 146

Index

M

N

O

P

VI 2009 RL

CONTINUED

........................Park Gear Position . 406 ...........................................Parking . 415

...............................Parking Brake . 191 Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 63, 508 ..Parking Over Things that Burn . 415

.............................PGM-FI System . 533 ........................Power Door Locks . 153

...............Power Socket Locations . 197 ............................Power Windows . 185

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19 ........................Protecting Children . 38 .......................Protecting Infants . 43

.......Protecting Larger Children . 52 .........Protecting Small Children . 44

Using Child Seats with .....................................Tethers . 51

.............................Using LATCH . 47

...................Radiator Overheating . 503 .............Radio/CD Sound System . 213

...........................Readiness Codes . 507 ..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 474

..........................Rear View Mirror . 161 ...............Rear Window Defogger . 147 .............Reclining the Seat Backs . 156

.......................Reminder Indicators . 62 ...........................................Remote . 166

Replacement Information ................Engine Oil and Filter . 459

..........................................Fuses . 510 ................................Light Bulbs . 468

....................................Schedule . 445 ...........................................Tires . 480

.............................Wiper Blades . 478 Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 25 ...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 389

...............................Restraint, Child . 38 ..................Reverse Gear Position . 406

............Reverse Tilt Door Mirror . 162 ..........................Rearview Camera . 381

......................................Roof Rack . 398 ................................Rotation, Tire . 485

................................Safety Belts . 10, 21 .........Safety Defects, Reporting . 540

.................................Safety Features . 9 .........................................Airbags . 11

.....................................Seat Belts . 10 .............Safety Labels, Location of . 57

..............................Safety Messages . iii .................Satellite Digital Radio . 229

...................................Seat Belts . 10, 21 ...............Additional Information . 21

Automatic Seat Belt ...............................Tensioners . 23

.....................................Cleaning . 476 .............................e-pretensioner . 24

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 22 ................................Maintenance . 25

Reminder Indicator and ................................Beeper . 21, 62

...................System Components . 21 ...............Use During Pregnancy . 19

..................................Seat Heaters . 181 ..................Seat Position Memory . 163

Index IN

D E

X

R

S

VII 2009 RL

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 493 Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 526 .....Emissions Control Systems . 532

Three Way Catalytic .............................Converters . 534

.......................Temperature Gauge . 70 ........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 212

....................Temperature, Outside . 73 ..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51

.........................Seat Ventilation . 182 ......................Seats, Adjusting the . 156

............................Security System . 315 .....Sequential Sports Shift Mode . 411

..........................Paddle Shifters . 409 ...............................Serial Number . 522

...........................Service Intervals . 445 ......Service Manual, Purchasing . 541

.........Service Station Procedures . 385 Super Handling-All Wheel Drive

...........................(SH-AWD ) . 413 ..Torque Distribution Monitor . 413

.......................................Indicator . 66 ...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 405

........................Shift Lock Release . 407 ..............................Side Airbags . 11, 32

How the Side Airbag off ......................Indicator Works . 35

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32 ................Side Curtain Airbags . 11, 34

How Your Side Curtain ..........................Airbags Work . 34

Side Marker Lights, Bulb .........................Replacement in . 471

.............................Signaling Turns . 140 .....................................Snow Tires . 487

................................Sound System . 213 Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 494 ............................Specifications . 525

.....................Specification Charts . 524 ................................Speed Limiter . 407

.......................................Spotlights . 200 ..........SRS, Additional Information . 26

...Additional Safety Precautions . 37 ..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34

How Your Airbags ............................Work . 29, 32, 34

........................SRS Components . 26 ..................................SRS Service . 36

.............................SRS Indicator . 34, 63 START (Ignition Switch

.....................................Position) . 152 .......................Starting the Engine . 403

...................Auto Control Mode . 403 In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 403 ................With a Dead Battery . 500

........Steam Coming from Engine . 503 Steering Wheel

..............................Adjustments . 148 ...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 152

......................Position Memory . 163 Steering Wheel Buttons/

.....................................Switches . 136 ...................Stereo Sound System . 213 ....................Storing Your Vehicle . 492

......................................Sun Visors . 196 Supplemental Restraint

................................System . 11, 26

......................................Servicing . 36 .........................SRS Indicator . 34, 63

...................System Components . 26 ..................................Synthetic Oil . 459

Index

T

VIII

TM

2009 RL

CONTINUED

Three Way Catalytic .................................Converters . 534

Tilt/Telescopic Steering .........................................Wheel . 148

....................................Timing Belt . 467

....................................Tire Chains . 487 .........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 495

Tire Pressure Monitoring ............System (TPMS) . 429, 530

Monitoring Tire Pressure ..................................Reading . 429

...........TPMS System Warning . 429 ...............................................Tires . 480

..............................Air Pressure . 482 ........................................Chains . 487

.........................Checking Wear . 483 ..........................Compact Spare . 494

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 526 ......................................Inflation . 480

..................................Inspection . 483 .............................Labeling . 528, 529

Low Tire Pressure ...........................Indicator . 67, 429

......................Pressure Monitor . 431 ........Pressure Monitor System . 429

...................................Replacing . 485

......................................Rotating . 485 ...........................................Snow . 487

............................Specifications . 525 ...................Tools, Tire Changing . 495

Torque Distribution Monitor .................................(SH-AWD) . 413

Towing .....................................A Trailer . 437

....Equipment and Accessories . 438 .............................Weight Limit . 437

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring ..................................System) . 429

Required Federal ............................Explanation . 530

.....................Warning Message . 433 .............................Trailer Loading . 437

......................Trailer Towing Tips . 441 Transmission

Checking Fluid Level, ..............................Automatic . 464

...........................Fluid Selection . 465 ..............Identification Number . 522 .............Shifting the Automatic . 405

.............................Treadwear . 483, 494

.......................................Trip Meter . 72

..............................................Trunk . 154 ..................Emergency Opener . 155

...............................Opening the . 154 .......Open Monitor Indicator . 13, 79

..................................Turn Signals . 140

Unexpected, Taking Care ..........................................of the . 493

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 526 ........................Unleaded Gasoline . 384

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 460

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 396 ......................Vehicle Dimensions . 524

....Vehicle Identification Number . 522 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 435 ...VSA Activation Indicator . 65, 435

.........................VSA Off Switch . 436 ........VSA System Indicator . 65, 435

Index IN

D E

X

U

V

IX 2009 RL

......................XM Satellite Radio . 229

.............................Vehicle Storage . 492 .................................................VIN . 522

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 458 ...................Voice Control System . 304

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii .........Warning Labels, Location of . 57

....................Warranty Coverages . 539 Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 464 ...................................Operation . 137

Wheels .............Adjusting the Steering . 148 ............Alignment and Balance . 485

..........................Compact Spare . 494 ...............................Nut Wrench . 496

Windows .............................Auto Reverse . 186

................Operating the Power . 185 .........................Rear, Defogger . 147

Windshield .....................................Cleaning . 137 ...................................Defroster . 207

.....................................Washers . 137

Wipers, Windshield .......................Changing Blades . 478

...................................Operation . 137 ........Summer/Winter Position . 139

..............................................WMA . 243 ....................................Worn Tires . 483

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 519

: :

U.S. only Canada only

Index

X

W

X 2009 RL

2009 RL

2009 RL

2009 RL

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid: Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure:

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid: 4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Oil change capacity (including filter):

Premium unleaded gasoline, pump octane number of 91 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20 detergent oil (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary replacement (see page ).

Front:

Rear:

Capacity: SH-AWD differential case

0.77 US qt (0.73 ) SH-AWD clutch case

2.8 US qt (2.7 )

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API service classified GL4 or GL5 only.

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

19.4 US gal (73 )

Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid) (see page

).

Use Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid) only.

Acura Power Steering Fluid preferred, or another brand of power steering fluid as a temporary replacement. Do not use ATF (see page ).

458

465 467

466

2009 RL

This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owners manual covers all models of the Acura RL. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owners Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNERS SIGNATURE

<

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the RL Acura works, you can view and download the Acura RL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Acura RL as well as other Acura manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Acura RL. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Acura RL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Acura RL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Acura RL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Acura RL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Acura RL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.